Grandstream Networks UCM6202 IP PBX User Manual

Grandstream Networks, Inc. IP PBX

User Manual

        Grandstream Networks, Inc. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 1 of 321    UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Table of Content GNU GPL INFORMATION ........................................................................ 17 CHANGE LOG ......................................................................................... 18 FIRMWARE VERSION 1.0.0.1 ............................................................................................................ 18 WELCOME ............................................................................................... 19 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 21 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 21 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 25 EQUIPMENT PACKAGING ................................................................................................................. 25 CONNECT YOUR UCM6200 .............................................................................................................. 25 CONNECT THE UCM6202 ........................................................................................................... 25 CONNECT THE UCM6204 ........................................................................................................... 26 CONNECT THE UCM6208 ........................................................................................................... 27 SAFETY COMPLIANCES ................................................................................................................... 28 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................ 28 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................ 31 USE THE LCD MENU ......................................................................................................................... 31 USE THE LED INDICATORS .............................................................................................................. 33 USE THE WEB GUI ............................................................................................................................ 34 ACCESS WEB GUI ...................................................................................................................... 34 SETUP WIZARD ........................................................................................................................... 36 WEB GUI CONFIGURATIONS ..................................................................................................... 37 WEB GUI LANGUAGES ............................................................................................................... 37 SAVE AND APPLY CHANGES ..................................................................................................... 38 MAKE YOUR FIRST CALL .................................................................................................................. 38 SYSTEM SETTINGS ................................................................................ 39 USER MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 39 USER PRIVILEGES ..................................................................................................................... 39 CREATE NEW WEB UI USER ..................................................................................................... 40 USER PORTAL ............................................................................................................................. 42 CONCURRENT MULTI-USER LOGIN ......................................................................................... 43
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 2 of 321    OPERATION LOG ........................................................................................................................ 43 CHANGE PASSWORD ....................................................................................................................... 45 CHANGE BINDNG EMAIL ........................................................................................................... 46 NETWORK SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................... 47 BASIC SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 47 802.1X .......................................................................................................................................... 52 STATIC ROUTES.......................................................................................................................... 53 PORT FORWORDING.................................................................................................................. 56 DDNS SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 58 FIREWALL ........................................................................................................................................... 60 STATIC DEFENSE ....................................................................................................................... 60 DYNAMIC DEFENSE ................................................................................................................... 63 FAIL2BAN ..................................................................................................................................... 64 LDAP SERVER .................................................................................................................................... 65 LDAP SERVER CONFIGURATIONS ........................................................................................... 66 LDAP PHONEBOOK .................................................................................................................... 67 LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................. 70 HTTP SERVER .................................................................................................................................... 72 EMAIL SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................... 73 TIME SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................. 74 AUTO TIME UPDATING ............................................................................................................... 74 SET TIME MANUALLY ................................................................................................................. 76 OFFICE TIME ............................................................................................................................... 76 HOLIDAY ...................................................................................................................................... 78 NTP SERVER ...................................................................................................................................... 80 RECORDINGS STORAGE .................................................................................................................. 80 LOGIN TIMEOUT SETTINGS ............................................................................................................. 82 GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT ....................................................................................... 83 PROVISIONING ....................................................................................... 87 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 87 CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE FOR END POINT DEVICE ...................................................... 87 AUTO PROVISIONING SETTINGS .................................................................................................... 88 DISCOVERY ........................................................................................................................................ 91 GLOBAL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 92 GLOBAL POLICY ......................................................................................................................... 92 GLOBAL TEMPLATES ............................................................................................................... 100 MODEL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 102 MODEL TEMPLATES ................................................................................................................. 102 MODEL UPDATE ........................................................................................................................ 104 DEVICE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................. 105
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 3 of 321    CREATE NEW DEVICE .............................................................................................................. 105 MANAGE DEVICES ................................................................................................................... 106 SAMPLE APPLICATION .................................................................................................................... 113 EXTENSIONS ......................................................................................... 119 CREATE NEW USER ........................................................................................................................ 119 CREATE NEW SIP EXTENSION ............................................................................................... 119 CREATE NEW IAX EXTENSION ............................................................................................... 125 CREATE NEW FXS EXTENSION .............................................................................................. 129 BATCH ADD EXTENSIONS .............................................................................................................. 134 BATCH ADD SIP EXTENSIONS ................................................................................................ 134 BATCH ADD IAX EXTENSIONS ................................................................................................ 137 SEARCH AND EDIT EXTENSION .................................................................................................... 139 EXPORT EXTENSIONS .................................................................................................................... 141 IMPORT EXTENSIONS..................................................................................................................... 141 EMAIL TO USER ............................................................................................................................... 142 MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS PER EXTENSION ............................................................................. 144 SMS MESSAGE SUPPORT .............................................................................................................. 145 TRUNKS ................................................................................................. 147 ANALOG TRUNKS ............................................................................................................................ 147 ANALOG TRUNK CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ 147 PSTN DETECTION .................................................................................................................... 150 VOIP TRUNKS .................................................................................................................................. 153 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) ........................................................................................ 164 SLA STATION ........................................................................................ 167 CREATE/EDIT SLA STATION ........................................................................................................... 167 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................. 168 CALL ROUTES ...................................................................................... 171 OUTBOUND ROUTES ...................................................................................................................... 171 INBOUND ROUTES .......................................................................................................................... 173 INBOUND RULE CONFIGURATIONS ....................................................................................... 174 INBOUND ROUTE: PREPEND EXAMPLE ................................................................................ 175 INBOUND ROUTE: MULTIPLE MODE ...................................................................................... 176 FAX INTELLIGENT ROUTE ....................................................................................................... 177 FAX WITH TWO MEDIA ............................................................................................................. 178 BLACKLIST CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................... 178 CONFERENCE BRIDGE ........................................................................ 181
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 4 of 321    CONFERENCE BRIDGE CONFIGURATIONS .......................................................................... 181 JOIN A CONFERENCE CALL .................................................................................................... 183 INVITE OTHER PARTIES TO JOIN CONFERENCE ................................................................. 183 DURING THE CONFERENCE ................................................................................................... 184 RECORD CONFERENCE .......................................................................................................... 185 CONFERENCE SCHEDULE .................................................................. 187 CONFERENCE SCHEUDLE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 187 IVR ......................................................................................................... 191 CONFIGURE IVR .............................................................................................................................. 191 CREATE CUSTOM PROMPT ........................................................................................................... 193 RECORD NEW CUSTOM PROMPT .......................................................................................... 193 UPLOAD CUSTOM PROMPT .................................................................................................... 194 LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT .................................... 195 DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL VOICE PROMPT PACKAGE ............................................................... 195 CUSTOMIZE SPECIFIC PROMPT ................................................................................................... 197 VOICEMAIL ............................................................................................ 199 CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL ................................................................................................................ 199 ACCESS VOICEMAIL ....................................................................................................................... 200 VOICEMAIL EMAIL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................ 201 CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL GROUP .................................................................................................. 202 RING GROUP ......................................................................................... 205 CONFIGURE RING GROUP ............................................................................................................. 205 REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP ........................................................................................ 207 PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP ....................................................... 211 CONFIGURE PAGING/INTERCOM GROUP .................................................................................... 211 CALL QUEUE ........................................................................................ 213 CONFIGURE CALL QUEUE ............................................................................................................. 213 EXTENSION GROUPS ........................................................................... 217 CONFIGURE EXTENSION GROUPS .............................................................................................. 217 USING EXTENSION GROUPS ......................................................................................................... 218 PICKUP GROUPS .................................................................................. 219 CONFIGURE PICKUP GROUPS ...................................................................................................... 219
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 5 of 321    CONFIGURE PICKUP FEATURE CODE.......................................................................................... 219 MUSIC ON HOLD ................................................................................... 221 FAX/T.38 ................................................................................................. 223 CONFIGURE FAX/T.38 ..................................................................................................................... 223 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION TO RECEIVE FAX FROM PSTN LINE ............................................... 224 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR FAX-TO-EMAIL .......................................................................... 227 ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE (RESTRICTED ACCESS) ............ 229 BUSY CAMP-ON .................................................................................... 231 FOLLOW ME .......................................................................................... 233 ONE-KEY DIAL ...................................................................................... 237 DISA ....................................................................................................... 239 CALLBACK FEATURE .......................................................................... 241 BLF AND EVENT LIST ........................................................................... 243 BLF .................................................................................................................................................... 243 EVENT LIST ...................................................................................................................................... 243 DIAL BY NAME ...................................................................................... 247 DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION................................................................................................... 247 ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR ........................................................... 251 ACTIVE CALLS STATUS .................................................................................................................. 251 HANG UP ACTIVE CALLS ................................................................................................................ 252 CALL MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 252 CALL FEATURES .................................................................................. 255 FEATURE CODES ............................................................................................................................ 255 CALL RECORDING ........................................................................................................................... 259 CALL PARK ....................................................................................................................................... 260 PARK A CALL ............................................................................................................................. 260 RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL ................................................................................................ 260 ENABLE SPY .................................................................................................................................... 260 INTERNAL OPTIONS ............................................................................. 263
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 6 of 321    INTERNAL OPTIONS/GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 263 INTERNAL OPTIONS/JITTER BUFFER ........................................................................................... 265 INTERNAL OPTIONS/RTP SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 266 INTERNAL OPTIONS/PAYLOAD ...................................................................................................... 266 IAX SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 269 IAX SETTINGS/GENERAL................................................................................................................ 269 IAX SETTINGS/REGISTRATION ...................................................................................................... 269 IAX SETTINGS/STATIC DEFENSE .................................................................................................. 270 SIP SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 271 SIP SETTINGS/GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 271 SIP SETTINGS/MISC ........................................................................................................................ 271 SIP SETTINGS/SESSION TIMER ..................................................................................................... 272 SIP SETTINGS/TCP AND TLS .......................................................................................................... 272 SIP SETTINGS/NAT .......................................................................................................................... 273 SIP SETTINGS/TOS.......................................................................................................................... 274 PORTS CONFIG .................................................................................... 277 VALUE-ADDED FEATURES .................................................................. 279 FAX SENDING .................................................................................................................................. 279 ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER ......................................................................................................... 279 ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER SETTINGS ............................................................................... 280 GROUP SETTINGS .................................................................................................................... 280 STATUS AND REPORTING ................................................................... 283 PBX STATUS ..................................................................................................................................... 283 TRUNKS ..................................................................................................................................... 283 EXTENSIONS ............................................................................................................................. 284 QUEUES ..................................................................................................................................... 285 CONFERENCE ROOMS ............................................................................................................ 286 INTERFACES STATUS............................................................................................................... 287 PARKING LOT ............................................................................................................................ 288 SYSTEM STATUS ............................................................................................................................. 289 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 289 NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 290 STORAGE USAGE ..................................................................................................................... 290 RESOURCE USAGE .................................................................................................................. 291 SYSTEM EVENTS ............................................................................................................................ 292 ALERT EVENTS LIST ................................................................................................................ 292
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 7 of 321    ALERT LOG ................................................................................................................................ 294 ALERT CONTACT ...................................................................................................................... 295 CDR ................................................................................................................................................... 295 CDR IMPROVEMENT ................................................................................................................ 298 DOWNLOADED CDR FILE ........................................................................................................ 299 STATISTICS ................................................................................................................................ 301 RECORDING FILES ................................................................................................................... 301 API CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 302 UPGRADING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 305 UPGRADING ..................................................................................................................................... 305 UPGRADING VIA NETWORK .................................................................................................... 305 UPGRADING VIA LOCAL UPLOAD ........................................................................................... 306 NO LOCAL FIRMWARE SERVERS ........................................................................................... 308 BACKUP ............................................................................................................................................ 308 BACKUP/RESTORE ................................................................................................................... 308 DATA SYNC ................................................................................................................................ 311 RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM BACKUP FILE ............................................................... 312 CLEANER .......................................................................................................................................... 313 RESET AND REBOOT ...................................................................................................................... 314 SYSLOG ............................................................................................................................................ 315 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................................... 315 ETHERNET CAPTURE .............................................................................................................. 315 IP PING ....................................................................................................................................... 316 TRACEROUTE ........................................................................................................................... 317 ANALOG RECORD TRACE ....................................................................................................... 317 SERVICE CHECK ...................................................................................................................... 318 NETWORK STATUS ................................................................................................................... 318 REMOTE ACCESS ............................................................................................................................ 319 SSH ACCESS ............................................................................................................................. 319 EXPERIENCING THE UCM6200 SERIES IP PBX ................................. 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 8 of 321    Table of Tables UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual  Table 1: Technical Specifications................................................................................................................. 21 Table 2: UCM6202/UCM6204 Equipment Packaging ................................................................................. 25 Table 3: LCD Menu Options ........................................................................................................................ 32 Table 4: UCM6202/UCM6204 LED INDICATORS ...................................................................................... 33 Table 5: UCM6208 LED INDICATORS ....................................................................................................... 34 Table 6: User Management->Create New User .......................................................................................... 41 Table 7: Operation Log Column Header ..................................................................................................... 44 Table 8: Change Binding Email option ........................................................................................................ 47 Table 9: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Basic Settings .............................................................. 47 Table 10: UCM6208 Network Settings->Basic Settings .............................................................................. 49 Table 11: UCM6200 Network Settings->802.1X ......................................................................................... 53 Table 12: UCM6200 Network Settings->Static Routes ............................................................................... 54 Table 13: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Port Forwarding .......................................................... 56 Table 14: UCM6200 Firewall->Static Defense->Current Service ................................................................ 61 Table 15: Typical Firewall Settings .............................................................................................................. 61 Table 16: Firewall Rule Settings .................................................................................................................. 62 Table 17: UCM6200 Firewall Dynamic Defense ......................................................................................... 63 Table 18: Fail2Ban Settings ........................................................................................................................ 64 Table 19: HTTP Server Settings .................................................................................................................. 73 Table 20: Email Settings .............................................................................................................................. 73 Table 21: Time Auto Updating ..................................................................................................................... 75 Table 22: Create New Office Time .............................................................................................................. 77 Table 23: Create New Holiday..................................................................................................................... 79 Table 24: Auto Provision Settings ............................................................................................................... 90 Table 25: Global Policy Parameters->Localization ..................................................................................... 93 Table 26: Global Policy Parameters->Phone Settings ................................................................................ 94 Table 27: Global Policy Parameters->Contact List ..................................................................................... 95 Table 28: Global Policy Parameters->Maintenance .................................................................................... 97 Table 29: Global Policy Parameters->Network Settings ............................................................................. 98 Table 30: Global Policy Parameters->Customization.................................................................................. 99 Table 31: Create New Template ................................................................................................................ 100 Table 32: Create New Model Template ..................................................................................................... 102 Table 33: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings ....................................................... 120 Table 34: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Media..................................................................... 121 Table 35: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Features ................................................................ 122 Table 36: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time ......................................................... 125 Table 37: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings ....................................................... 125 Table 38: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Media .................................................................... 126
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 9 of 321    Table 39: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Features ................................................................ 127 Table 40: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time ......................................................... 129 Table 41: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings ...................................................... 130 Table 42: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Media ................................................................... 131 Table 43: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Features ............................................................... 132 Table 44: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time ........................................................ 134 Table 45: Batch Add SIP Extension Parameters ....................................................................................... 135 Table 46: Batch Add IAX Extension Parameters ....................................................................................... 137 Table 47: Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters ................................................................................... 147 Table 48: PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk ............................................................................................. 152 Table 49: Create New SIP Trunk ............................................................................................................... 154 Table 50: SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 155 Table 51: SIP Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters ................................................................................ 158 Table 52: Create New IAX Trunk ............................................................................................................... 161 Table 53: IAX Register Trunk Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 161 Table 54: IAX Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters ................................................................................ 162 Table 55: SLA Station Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................... 167 Table 56: Outbound Route Configuration Parameters .............................................................................. 171 Table 57: Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters ................................................................................... 174 Table 58: Conference Bridge Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 181 Table 59: Conference Caller IVR Menu .................................................................................................... 185 Table 60: Conference Schedule Parameters ............................................................................................ 187 Table 61: IVR Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................. 191 Table 62: Voicemail Settings ..................................................................................................................... 199 Table 63: Voicemail IVR Menu .................................................................................................................. 200 Table 64: Voicemail Email Settings ........................................................................................................... 201 Table 65: Voicemail Group Settings .......................................................................................................... 203 Table 66: Ring Group Parameters ............................................................................................................ 205 Table 67: Paging/Intercom Group Configuration Parameters ................................................................... 211 Table 68: Call Queue Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................... 213 Table 69: FAX/T.38 Settings ...................................................................................................................... 223 Table 70: Follow Me Settings .................................................................................................................... 234 Table 71: Follow Me Options ..................................................................................................................... 235 Table 72: DISA Settings ............................................................................................................................ 239 Table 73: Callback Configuration Parameters........................................................................................... 241 Table 74: Event List Settings ..................................................................................................................... 243 Table 75: UCM6200 Feature Codes ......................................................................................................... 255 Table 76: Internal Options/General ........................................................................................................... 263 Table 77: Internal Options/Jitter Buffer ...................................................................................................... 265 Table 78: Internal Options/RTP Settings ................................................................................................... 266 Table 79: Internal Options/Payload ........................................................................................................... 266
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 10 of 321    Table 80: IAX Settings/General ................................................................................................................. 269 Table 81: IAX Settings/Registration .......................................................................................................... 269 Table 82: IAX Settings/Static Defense ...................................................................................................... 270 Table 83: SIP Settings/General ................................................................................................................. 271 Table 84: SIP Settings/Misc ...................................................................................................................... 271 Table 85: SIP Settings/Session Timer ....................................................................................................... 272 Table 86: SIP Settings/TCP and TLS ........................................................................................................ 272 Table 87: SIP Settings/NAT ....................................................................................................................... 273 Table 88: SIP Settings/ToS ........................................................................................................................ 274 Table 89: Internal Options/Ports Config .................................................................................................... 277 Table 90: Announcements Center Settings ............................................................................................... 280 Table 91: Group Settings ........................................................................................................................... 280 Table 92: Trunk Status ............................................................................................................................... 283 Table 93: Extension Status ........................................................................................................................ 285 Table 94: Agent Status .............................................................................................................................. 286 Table 95: Interface Status Indicators ......................................................................................................... 287 Table 96: Parking Lot Status ..................................................................................................................... 288 Table 97: System Status->General ........................................................................................................... 289 Table 98: System Status->Network ........................................................................................................... 290 Table 99: CDR Filter Criteria ..................................................................................................................... 296 Table 100: CDR Statistics Filter Criteria .................................................................................................... 301 Table 101: API Configuration Files ............................................................................................................ 302 Table 102: Network Upgrade Configuration .............................................................................................. 306 Table 103: Data Sync Configuration ......................................................................................................... 311 Table 104: Cleaner Configuration ............................................................................................................. 313
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 11 of 321    Table of Figures UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual  Figure 1: UCM6202 Front View ................................................................................................................... 25 Figure 2: UCM6202 Back View ................................................................................................................... 26 Figure 3: UCM6204 Front View ................................................................................................................... 26 Figure 4: UCM6204 Back View ................................................................................................................... 27 Figure 5: UCM6208 Front View ................................................................................................................... 28 Figure 6: UCM6208 Back View ................................................................................................................... 28 Figure 7: UCM6204 Web GUI Login Page .................................................................................................. 34 Figure 8: UCM6200 Setup Wizard .............................................................................................................. 36 Figure 9: UCM6200 Web GUI Language .................................................................................................... 37 Figure 10: User Management Page Display ............................................................................................... 39 Figure 11: Create New User ........................................................................................................................ 41 Figure 12: User Management – New Users ................................................................................................ 41 Figure 13: Edit User Information by Super Admin....................................................................................... 42 Figure 14: User Portal Login ....................................................................................................................... 42 Figure 15: User Portal Layout ..................................................................................................................... 43 Figure 16: Multiple User Operation Error Prompt ....................................................................................... 43 Figure 17: Operation Logs .......................................................................................................................... 44 Figure 18: Operation Logs Filter ................................................................................................................. 45 Figure 19 : Change Password..................................................................................................................... 46 Figure 20: Change Binding Email ............................................................................................................... 46 Figure 21: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Route ............................................................................. 50 Figure 22: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Switch ............................................................................ 51 Figure 23: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Dual ............................................................................... 52 Figure 24: UCM6200 Using 802.1X as Client ............................................................................................. 52 Figure 25: UCM6200 Using 802.1X EAP-MD5 ........................................................................................... 53 Figure 26: UCM6204 Static Route Sample ................................................................................................. 55 Figure 27: UCM6204 Static Route Configuration ........................................................................................ 55 Figure 28: UCM6202/UCM6204 Port Forwarding Configuration ................................................................ 57 Figure 29: GXP2160 Web Access Using UCM6202 Port Forwarding ........................................................ 58 Figure 30: Register Domain Name on noip.com ......................................................................................... 59 Figure 31: UCM6200 DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................... 59 Figure 32: Using Domain Name to Connect to UCM6200 .......................................................................... 60 Figure 33: Create New Firewall Rule .......................................................................................................... 62 Figure 34: Configure Dynamic Defense ...................................................................................................... 64 Figure 35: LDAP Server Configurations ...................................................................................................... 66 Figure 36: Default LDAP Phonebook DN .................................................................................................... 66 Figure 37: Default LDAP Phonebook Attributes .......................................................................................... 67 Figure 38: LDAP Server->LDAP Phonebook .............................................................................................. 67
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 12 of 321    Figure 39: Add LDAP Phonebook ............................................................................................................... 68 Figure 40: Edit LDAP Phonebook ............................................................................................................... 68 Figure 41: Import Phonebook...................................................................................................................... 69 Figure 42: Phonebook CSV File Format ..................................................................................................... 69 Figure 43: LDAP Phonebook After Import ................................................................................................... 70 Figure 44: Export Selected LDAP Phonebook ............................................................................................ 70 Figure 45: LDAP Client Configurations ....................................................................................................... 71 Figure 46: GXP2200 LDAP Phonebook Configuration ............................................................................... 72 Figure 47: UCM6200 Email Settings ........................................................................................................... 74 Figure 48: Set Time Manually ..................................................................................................................... 76 Figure 49: Create New Office Time ............................................................................................................. 77 Figure 50: Settings->Time Settings->Office Time ....................................................................................... 78 Figure 51: Create New Holiday ................................................................................................................... 78 Figure 52: Settings->Time Settings->Holiday ............................................................................................. 79 Figure 53: Settings->Recordings Storage ................................................................................................... 80 Figure 54: Recordings Storage Prompt Information ................................................................................... 81 Figure 55: Recording Storage Category ..................................................................................................... 81 Figure 56: Login Timeout Settings .............................................................................................................. 82 Figure 57: Google Service Settings->OAuth2.0 Authentication .................................................................. 83 Figure 58: Google Service->New Project ................................................................................................... 84 Figure 59: Google Service->Create New Credential .................................................................................. 84 Figure 60: Google Service->OAuth2.0 Login .............................................................................................. 85 Figure 61: Zero Config Configuration Architecture for End Point Device ................................................... 88 Figure 62: UCM6200 Zero Config ............................................................................................................... 89 Figure 63: Auto Provision Settings .............................................................................................................. 90 Figure 64: Auto Discover ............................................................................................................................. 92 Figure 65: Discovered Devices ................................................................................................................... 92 Figure 66: Global Policy Categories ........................................................................................................... 93 Figure 67: Edit Global Template ................................................................................................................ 101 Figure 68: Edit Model Template ................................................................................................................ 103 Figure 69: Template Management ............................................................................................................ 104 Figure 70: Upload Model Template Manually ............................................................................................ 105 Figure 71: Create New Device .................................................................................................................. 106 Figure 72: Manage Devices ...................................................................................................................... 106 Figure 73: Edit Device ............................................................................................................................... 107 Figure 74: Edit Customize Device Settings ............................................................................................... 109 Figure 75: Add P Value in Customize Device Settings ............................................................................. 110 Figure 76: Modify Selected Devices - Same Model .................................................................................. 111 Figure 77: Modify Selected Devices - Different Models ............................................................................ 112 Figure 78: Device List in Zero Config ........................................................................................................ 113 Figure 79: Zero Config Sample - Global Policy......................................................................................... 114
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 13 of 321    Figure 80: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 1 .................................................................................. 115 Figure 81: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 2 .................................................................................. 116 Figure 82: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 3 .................................................................................. 117 Figure 83: Create New Device .................................................................................................................. 119 Figure 84: Manage Extensions ................................................................................................................. 140 Figure 85: Export Extensions .................................................................................................................... 141 Figure 86: Import Extensions .................................................................................................................... 141 Figure 87: Email To User - Prompt Information ......................................................................................... 142 Figure 88: Account Registration Information and QR Code ...................................................................... 143 Figure 89: LDAP Client Information and QR Code ................................................................................... 143 Figure 90: Multiple Registrations per Extension ....................................................................................... 144 Figure 91: Extension - Concurrent Registration ........................................................................................ 144 Figure 92: SMS Message Support ............................................................................................................ 145 Figure 93: UCM6200 FXO Tone Settings ................................................................................................. 150 Figure 94: UCM6200 PSTN Detection ...................................................................................................... 151 Figure 95: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Auto Detect ................................................................................. 151 Figure 96: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Semi-Auto Detect ....................................................................... 152 Figure 97: DOD extension selection ......................................................................................................... 164 Figure 98: Edit DOD .................................................................................................................................. 165 Figure 99: SLA Station .............................................................................................................................. 167 Figure 100: Enable SLA Mode for Analog Trunk ....................................................................................... 169 Figure 101: Analog Trunk with SLA Mode Enabled .................................................................................. 169 Figure 102: SLA Example - SLA Station ................................................................................................... 169 Figure 103: SLA Example - MPK Configuration ........................................................................................ 170 Figure 104: Inbound Route feature: Prepend ........................................................................................... 176 Figure 105: Inbound Route - Multiple Mode.............................................................................................. 177 Figure 106: Blacklist Configuration Parameters........................................................................................ 178 Figure 107: Blacklist csv File..................................................................................................................... 179 Figure 108: Conference Invitation From Web GUI .................................................................................... 183 Figure 109: Conference Recording ........................................................................................................... 186 Figure 110: Conference Schedule............................................................................................................. 190 Figure 111: Click on Prompt to Create IVR Prompt .................................................................................. 193 Figure 112: Record New Custom Prompt ................................................................................................. 194 Figure 113: Upload Custom Prompt .......................................................................................................... 194 Figure 114: Language Settings for Voice Prompt ..................................................................................... 195 Figure 115: Voice Prompt Package List .................................................................................................... 196 Figure 116: New Voice Prompt Language Added ..................................................................................... 196 Figure 117: Upload Single Voice Prompt for Entire Language Pack ........................................................ 197 Figure 118: Voicemail Email Settings ........................................................................................................ 202 Figure 119: Voicemail Group ..................................................................................................................... 203 Figure 120: Ring Group ............................................................................................................................. 205
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 14 of 321    Figure 121: Ring Group Configuration ...................................................................................................... 207 Figure 122: Sync LDAP Server option ...................................................................................................... 208 Figure 123: Manually Sync LDAP Server ................................................................................................. 208 Figure 124: Ring Group Remote Extension .............................................................................................. 209 Figure 125: Paging/Intercom Group .......................................................................................................... 211 Figure 126: Page/Intercom Group Settings .............................................................................................. 212 Figure 127: Call Queue ............................................................................................................................. 213 Figure 128: Agent Login Settings .............................................................................................................. 216 Figure 129: Edit Extension Group ............................................................................................................. 217 Figure 130: Select Extension Group in Outbound Route .......................................................................... 218 Figure 131: Edit Pickup Group .................................................................................................................. 219 Figure 132: Edit Pickup Feature Code ...................................................................................................... 220 Figure 133: Music On Hold Default Class ................................................................................................. 221 Figure 134: Configure Analog Trunk without Fax Detection ..................................................................... 225 Figure 135: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: FXS Extension ......................................................... 225 Figure 136: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: Analog Settings ........................................................ 226 Figure 137: Configure Inbound Rule for Fax ............................................................................................. 226 Figure 138: Create Fax Extension ............................................................................................................ 227 Figure 139: Inbound Route to Fax Extension ........................................................................................... 228 Figure 140: Create Follow Me ................................................................................................................... 233 Figure 141: Edit Follow Me ....................................................................................................................... 233 Figure 142: Configure One-Key Dial ......................................................................................................... 237 Figure 143: One-Key Dial Destinations ..................................................................................................... 238 Figure 144: Create New DISA................................................................................................................... 239 Figure 145: Create New Event List ........................................................................................................... 244 Figure 146: Create Dial By Name Group .................................................................................................. 247 Figure 147: Dial By Name Group In IVR Key Pressing Events ................................................................ 248 Figure 148: Dial By Name Group In Inbound Rule ................................................................................... 249 Figure 149: Configure Extension First Name and Last Name .................................................................. 250 Figure 150: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls - Ringing .......................................................................... 251 Figure 151: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls – Call Established ........................................................... 251 Figure 152: Configure to Monitor an Active Call ....................................................................................... 252 Figure 153: Download Recording File from CDR Page ............................................................................ 259 Figure 154: Download Recording File from Recording Files Page ........................................................... 260 Figure 155: FXS Ports Signaling Preference ............................................................................................ 277 Figure 156: FXO Ports ACIM Settings ...................................................................................................... 277 Figure 157: Fax Sending in Web UI .......................................................................................................... 279 Figure 158: Announcements Center ......................................................................................................... 280 Figure 159: Announcements Center Group Configuration ........................................................................ 281 Figure 160: Announcements Center Code Configuration ......................................................................... 282 Figure 161: Announcements Center Example .......................................................................................... 282
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 15 of 321    Figure 162: Status->PBX Status ............................................................................................................... 283 Figure 163: Trunk Status ........................................................................................................................... 283 Figure 164: Extension Status .................................................................................................................... 284 Figure 165: Queue Status ......................................................................................................................... 286 Figure 166: Conference Room Status ....................................................................................................... 287 Figure 167: UCM6204 Interfaces Status ................................................................................................... 287 Figure 168: Parking Lot Status .................................................................................................................. 288 Figure 169: System Status->Storage Usage ............................................................................................. 291 Figure 170: System Status->Resource Usage .......................................................................................... 291 Figure 171: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Disk Usage ................................................................... 292 Figure 172: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Memory Usage ............................................................. 293 Figure 173: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Reboot ............................................................. 293 Figure 174: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Crash ............................................................... 293 Figure 175: System Events->Alert Log ..................................................................................................... 294 Figure 176: Filter for Alert Log .................................................................................................................. 295 Figure 177: CDR Filter .............................................................................................................................. 296 Figure 178: Call Report ............................................................................................................................. 297 Figure 179: Call Report Entry with Audio Recording File .......................................................................... 297 Figure 180: Automatic Download Settings ................................................................................................ 298 Figure 181: CDR Report ........................................................................................................................... 298 Figure 182: Detailed CDR Information ...................................................................................................... 299 Figure 183: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Call To Shows "s" .............................................................. 299 Figure 184: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 1 ................................ 300 Figure 185: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 2 ................................ 300 Figure 186: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 3 ................................ 300 Figure 187: CDR Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 301 Figure 188: CDR->Recording Files ........................................................................................................... 302 Figure 189: Network Upgrade ................................................................................................................... 305 Figure 190: Local Upgrade........................................................................................................................ 306 Figure 191: Upgrading Firmware Files ...................................................................................................... 307 Figure 192: Reboot UCM6200 .................................................................................................................. 307 Figure 193: Create New Backup ............................................................................................................... 309 Figure 194: Backup / Restore ................................................................................................................... 310 Figure 195: Local Backup ......................................................................................................................... 310 Figure 196: Data Sync .............................................................................................................................. 311 Figure 197: Restore UCM6200 from Backup File ..................................................................................... 312 Figure 198: Cleaner .................................................................................................................................. 313 Figure 199: Reset and Reboot .................................................................................................................. 314 Figure 200: Ethernet Capture.................................................................................................................... 316 Figure 201: PING ...................................................................................................................................... 316 Figure 202: Traceroute .............................................................................................................................. 317
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 16 of 321    Figure 203: Troubleshooting Analog Trunks ............................................................................................. 318 Figure 204: Service Check ........................................................................................................................ 318 Figure 205: Network Status ....................................................................................................................... 319 Figure 206: SSH Access ........................................................................................................................... 320
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 17 of 321    GNU GPL INFORMATION  UCM6200 firmware contains third-party software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL). Grandstream  uses  software  under  the  specific  terms  of  the  GPL.  Please  see  the  GNU  General  Public License (GPL) for the exact terms and conditions of the license.  Grandstream GNU GPL related source code can be downloaded from Grandstream web site from: http://www.grandstream.com/support/faq/gnu-general-public-license/gnu-gpl-information-download
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 18 of 321    CHANGE LOG  This section documents significant changes from previous versions of the UCM6200 user manuals. Only major new features or major document updates are listed here. Minor updates for corrections or editing are not documented here.   FIRMWARE VERSION 1.0.0.1   This is the initial version.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 19 of 321    WELCOME  Thank you for purchasing Grandstream UCM6200 series IP PBX appliance. The UCM6200 series IP PBX appliance  is  designed  to  bring  enterprise-grade  voice,  video,  data,  and  mobility  features  to small-to-medium businesses (SMBs) in an easy-to-manage fashion. This IP PBX series allows businesses to  unify  multiple  communication  technologies,  such  comprehensive  voice,  video  calling,  video conferencing, video surveillance, data tools and facility access management onto one common network that that  can be managed  and/or accessed remotely. The UCM6200 series  supports  a dual core  1GHz ARM  CortexTM  A9  and  400Mhz  VINETICTM A8  processors,  1GB  RAM  and  4GB  flash.  The  secure  and reliable UCM6200 series delivers enterprise-grade features without any licensing fees, costs-per-feature or recurring fees.        --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  Caution: Changes  or  modifications  to  this  product  not  expressly  approved  by  Grandstream,  or  operation  of  this product in any way other than as detailed by this User Manual, could void your manufacturer warranty.   Warning:   Please do not use a different power adaptor with the UCM6200 as it may cause damage to the products and void the manufacturer warranty. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    This  document  is subject  to change  without  notice.  The  latest electronic  version  of  this user  manual  is available for download here: http://www.grandstream.com/support  Reproduction or transmittal of the entire or any part, in any form or by any means, electronic or print, for any purpose without the express written permission of Grandstream Networks, Inc. is not permitted.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 20 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 21 of 321    PRODUCT OVERVIEW TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table 1: Technical Specifications Interfaces Analog Telephone FXS Ports 2 ports (both with lifeline capability in case of power outage) PSTN Line FXO Ports   UCM6202: 2 ports   UCM6204: 4 ports   UCM6208: 8 ports Network Interfaces   UCM6202/6204:  Dual  Gigabit  RJ45  ports  with  integrated  PoE  Plus (IEEE 802.3at-2009)   UCM6208: Single Gigabit RJ45 port with integrated PoE Plus (IEEE 802.3at-2009) NAT Router Yes, UCM6204/UCM6208 only Peripheral Ports USB, SD LED Indicators Power/Ready, Network, PSTN Line, USB, SD LCD Display 128x32 graphic LCD with DOWN and OK button Reset Switch Yes Voice/Video Capabilities Voice-over-Packet Capabilities LEC  with NLP  Packetized  Voice  Protocol  Unit, 128ms-tail-length carrier grade  Line  Echo  Cancellation,  Dynamic  Jitter  Buffer,  Modem  detection and auto-switch to G.711 Voice and Fax Codecs G.711  A-law/U-law,  G.722,  G.723.1  5.3K/6.3K,  G.726,  G.729A/B,  iLBC (30ms only), GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, ADPCM; T.38 Video Codecs H.264, H.263, H.263+, VP8 QoS Layer 3 QoS, Layer 2 QoS Signaling and Control DTMF Methods In Audio, RFC2833, and SIP INFO Provisioning Protocol and   Plug-and-Play TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS,  auto-discovery  and  auto-provisioning  of   Grandstream IP endpoints via ZeroConfig (DHCP Option 66/multicast SIP SUBSCRIBE/mDNS), eventlist between local and remote trunk Network Protocols TCP/UDP/IP,  RTP/RTCP,  ICMP,  ARP,  DNS,  DDNS,  DHCP,  NTP,  TFTP, SSH, HTTP/HTTPS, PPPoE, SIP (RFC3261), STUN, SRTP, TLS Disconnect Methods Call Progress Tone, Polarity Reversal, Hook Flash Timing, Loop Current Disconnect, Busy Tone
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 22 of 321    Security Media SRTP, TLS, HTTPS, SSH Physical Universal Power Supply   Output: 12VDC, 1.5A   Input: 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz Dimensions   UCM6202/6204: 226mm (L) x 155mm (W) x 34.5mm (H)   UCM6208: 440mm (L) x 185mm (W) x 44mm (H) Environmental   Operating: 32 - 104oF / 0 - 40oC, 10-90% (non-condensing)   Storage: 14 - 140oF / -10 - 60oC Mounting   UCM6202/6204: Wall mount and Desktop   UCM6208: Rack mount and Desktop Weight   UCM6202: Unit weight 0.51kg, Package weight 0.94kg   UCM6204: Unit weight 0.51kg, Package weight 0.94kg   UCM6208: Unit weight 2.23kg, Package weight 3.09kg Additional Features Multi-language Support English/Simplified Chinese/Traditional Chinese/Spanish/French/ Portuguese/German/Russian/Italian/Polish/Czech for Web UI; Customizable IVR/voice prompts for English, Chinese, British English, German, Spanish, Greek, French, Italian, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Swedish, Turkish, Hebrew, Arabic; Customizable language pack to support any other languages Caller ID Bellcore/Telcordia, ETSI-FSK, ETSI-DTMF, SIN 227 - BT Polarity Reversal/ Wink Yes, with enable/disable option upon call establishment and termination Call Center Multiple  configurable  call  queues,  automatic  call  distribution  (ACD) based on agent skills/availability busy level, in-queue announcement Customizable Auto Attendant Up to 5 layers of IVR (Interactive Voice Response) Maximum Call Capacity   UCM6202: Concurrent audio calls up to 50, concurrent WebRTC calls up to 25   UCM6204:  Concurrent  audio  calls  up  to  75,  concurrent  WebRTC calls up to 35   UCM6208:  Concurrent  audio  calls  up  to  100,  concurrent WebRTC calls up to 50 Or up to 66% performance if calls are SRTP encrypted Conference Bridges   UCM6202/6204:  Up  to  3  password-protected  conference  bridges allowing up to 25 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants   UCM6208: Up to 6 password-protected conference bridges allowing up to 32 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 23 of 321    Call Features Call  park,  call  forward,  call  transfer,  DND,  ring/hunt  group, paging/intercom and etc Compliance   FCC: Part 15 (CFR 47) Class B, Part 68   CE:  EN55022  Class  B,  EN55024,  EN61000-3-2,  EN61000-3-3, EN60950-1, TBR21, RoHS   A-TICK:  AS/NZS  CISPR  22  Class  B,  AS/NZS  CISPR  24,  AS/NZS 60950, AS/ACIF S002 and ITU-T K.21 (Basic Level)   UL 60950 (power adapter)      ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note:     UCM6200 FXS ports lifeline functionality: The UCM6200 FXS  interfaces  are metallic through to the FXO interfaces. If  there is power outage, FXS1 port will fail over to FXO 1 port, FXS 2 port will fail over to FXO 2 port. The user can still access the PSTN connected with the FXO interfaces from FXS interfaces.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 24 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 25 of 321    INSTALLATION  Before deploying and configuring the UCM6200 series, the device needs to be properly powered up and connected to network. This section describes detailed information on installation, connection and warranty policy of the UCM6200 series.  EQUIPMENT PACKAGING  Table 2: UCM6202/UCM6204 Equipment Packaging Main Case Yes (1) Power Adaptor Yes (1) Ethernet Cable Yes (1) Quick Installation Guide Yes (1) GPL License Yes (1)   CONNECT YOUR UCM6200 CONNECT THE UCM6202   Figure 1: UCM6202 Front View
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 26 of 321     Figure 2: UCM6202 Back View   To set up the UCM6202, follow the steps below:  1.  Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the WAN port of the UCM6202. 2.  Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub. 3.  Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the 12V DC power jack on the back of the UCM6202. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet. 4.  Wait for  the UCM6202 to  boot up. The LCD in  the front  will show the  device  hardware  information when the boot process is done. 5.  Once the UCM6202 is successfully connected to network, the LED indicator for WAN in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address. 6.  (Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports.  CONNECT THE UCM6204   Figure 3: UCM6204 Front View
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 27 of 321       Figure 4: UCM6204 Back View   To set up the UCM6204, follow the steps below:  1.  Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the WAN port of the UCM6204. 2.  Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub. 3.  Connect the 12V DC  power adapter into the 12V DC  power jack on the back of the UCM6204. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet. 4.  Wait for the UCM6204 to boot up. The LCD in the front will show the device hardware information when the boot process is done. 5.  Once the UCM6204 is successfully connected to network, the LED indicator for WAN in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address. 6.  (Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports.   CONNECT THE UCM6208  To set up the UCM6208, follow the steps below:  1.  Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the LAN port of the UCM6208. 2.  Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub. 3.  Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the 12V DC power jack on the back of the UCM6208. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet. 4.  Wait for  the UCM6208 to  boot up. The  LCD in the front  will show the  device  hardware  information when the boot process is done. 5.  Once the UCM6208 is successfully connected to network, the LED indicator for NETWORK in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 28 of 321    6.  (Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports.     Figure 5: UCM6208 Front View      Figure 6: UCM6208 Back View  SAFETY COMPLIANCES  The UCM6200 series IP PBX complies with FCC/CE and various safety standards. The UCM6200 power adapter is compliant with the UL standard. Use the universal power adapter provided with the UCM6200 package only. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover damages to the device caused by unsupported power adapters.  WARRANTY  If  the  UCM6200  series  IP  PBX  was  purchased  from a  reseller,  please  contact  the  company  where the device  was  purchased  for  replacement,  repair  or  refund.  If  the  device  was  purchased  directly  from Grandstream,  contact  our  Technical  Support  Team  for  a  RMA  (Return  Materials  Authorization)  number before  the  product  is  returned.  Grandstream  reserves  the  right  to  remedy  warranty  policy  without  prior notification.    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 29 of 321      Warning:   Use the power adapter provided with the UCM6200 series IP PBX. Do not use a different power adapter as this may damage the device. This type of damage is not covered under warranty. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 30 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 31 of 321    GETTING STARTED  The UCM6200 series provides LCD interface, LED indication and web GUI configuration interface.    The LCD displays hardware, software and network information. Users could also navigate in the LCD menu for device information and basic network configuration.   The LED indication at the front of the device provides interface connection and activity status.   The web GUI gives users access to all the configurations and options for UCM6200 series setup.  This section provides step-by-step instructions on how to use the LCD menu, LED indicators and Web GUI of the UCM6200 series. Once the basic settings are done, users could start making calls from UCM6200 extension registered on a SIP phone as described at the end of this section.  USE THE LCD MENU   Default LCD Display When the device is powered up, the LCD will show device model (e.g., UCM6204), hardware version (e.g., V1.0A) and IP address. Press "Down" button and the system time will be displayed as well.   Menu Access Press "OK" button to start browsing menu options. Please see menu options in [Table 3: LCD Menu Options].   Menu Navigation Press  the "Down"  arrow key to  browser  different menu options. Press the  "OK"  button to  select  an entry.   Exit If "Back" option is available in the menu, select it to go back to the previous menu. For "Device Info" "Network Info" and "Web Info" which do not have "Back" option, simply press the "OK" button to go back to the previous menu. Also, the LCD will display default idle screen after staying in menu option for 15 seconds.   LCD Backlight   The LCD backlight will be on upon key pressing. The backlight will go off after the LCD stays in idle for 30 seconds.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 32 of 321    Table 3: LCD Menu Options View Events  Critical Events  Other Events Device Info  Hardware: Hardware version number  Software: Software version number  P/N: Part number  WAN MAC: WAN side MAC address (UCM6202/UCM6204 only)  LAN MAC: LAN side MAC address  Uptime: System up time Network Info For UCM6208:  LAN Mode: DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE  LAN IP: IP address  LAN Subnet Mask For UCM6202/UCM6204:  WAN Mode: DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE  WAN IP: IP address  WAN Subnet Mask  LAN IP: IP address  LAN Subnet Mask Network Menu For UCM6208:  LAN Mode: Select LAN mode as DHCP, Static IP or PPPoE  Static Route Reset: Click to reset the static route setting For UCM6202/UCM6204:  WAN Mode: Select WAN mode as DHCP, Static IP or PPPoE Static Route Reset: Click to reset the static route setting Factory Menu  Reboot  Factory Reset  LCD Test Patterns Press  "OK"  to  start.  Then  press  "Down"  button  to  test  different  LCD patterns. When done, press "OK" button to exit.  Fan Mode Select "Auto" or "On".  LED Test Patterns
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 33 of 321    Select "All On" "All Off" or "Blinking" and check LED status.  RTC Test Patterns Select  "2022-02-22  22:22"  or  "2011-01-11  11:11"  to  start  the  RTC (Real-Time Clock) test pattern. Then check the system time from LCD idle screen  by  pressing  "DOWN"  button,  or  from  web  GUI->System Status->General page. Reboot the device manually after the RTC test is done.  Hardware Testing Select "Test SVIP" to perform SVIP test on the device. This  is mainly for factory testing purpose which  verifies the hardware connection inside  the device. The diagnostic result will display in the LCD after the test is done. Web Info  Protocol: Web access protocol. HTTP or HTTPS. By default it's HTTPS  Port: Web access port number. By default it's 8089 SSH Switch  Enable SSH: Enable SSH access.  Disable SSH: Disable SSH access. By default the SSH access is disabled.   USE THE LED INDICATORS  The UCM6200 has LED indicators in the front to display connection status. The following table shows the status definitions.  Table 4: UCM6202/UCM6204 LED INDICATORS LED Indicator LED Status LAN WAN USB SD FXS (Phone/Fax) FXO (Telco Line)           Solid: Connected          Flashing: Data Transferring          OFF: Not Connected
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 34 of 321    Table 5: UCM6208 LED INDICATORS LED LED Status  NETWORK           Solid: Connected          OFF: Not Connected ACT USB SD Phone (FXS) Line (FXO)           Solid: Connected          Flashing: Data Transferring          OFF: Not Connected  USE THE WEB GUI ACCESS WEB GUI  The UCM6200 embedded Web server responds to HTTP/HTTPS GET/POST requests. Embedded HTML pages allow users to configure the device through a Web browser such as Microsoft IE, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome and etc.  Figure 7: UCM6204 Web GUI Login Page
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 35 of 321     To access the Web GUI:  1.  Connect the computer to the same network as the UCM6200. 2.  Ensure the device is properly powered up and shows its IP address on the LCD. 3.  Open a Web browser on the computer and enter the web GUI URL in the following format: http(s)://IP-Address:Port   where the IP-Address is the IP address displayed on the UCM6200 LCD. By default, the protocol is HTTPS and the Port number is 8089. For example, if the LCD shows 192.168.40.167, please enter the following in your web browser: https://192.168.40.167:8089 4. Enter  the  administrator’s  login  and  password  to  access  the  Web  Configuration  Menu.  The  default administrator's username and password is "admin" and "admin". It is highly recommended to change the default password after login for the first time.   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: By default, the UCM6200 has "Redirect From Port 80" enabled. Therefore, if users type in the UCM6200 IP address in the web browser, the web page will be automatically redirected to the page using HTTPS and port  8089.  For  example,  if  the  LCD  shows  192.168.40.167,  please  enter  192.168.40.167  in  your  web browser and the web page will be redirected to:  https://192.168.40.167:8089  The option "Redirect From Port 80" can be configured under the UCM6200 web GUI->Settings->HTTP Server. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 36 of 321      SETUP WIZARD  When the user logs in the UCM6200 web UI for the first time, a setup wizard will guide the user to set up basic configuration.  Configurations  in  setup  wizard  includes:  Time  zone,  Change  password,  Network  settings, Extensions, Trunk and routes.   Figure 8: UCM6200 Setup Wizard  During the wizard, the user can quit the setup wizard at any time to start over with manual configuration. At the last step of the wizard, the user will be provided with summary for review, before the configuration is loaded. Once the setup is completed, the system is ready to go.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 37 of 321    WEB GUI CONFIGURATIONS  There are four main sections in the Web GUI for users to view the PBX status, configure and manage the PBX.   Status: Displays PBX status, System Status, System Events and CDR.  PBX:  To  configure  extensions,  trunks,  call  routes,  zero  config  for  auto  provisioning,  call  features, internal options, IAX settings and SIP settings.  Settings:  To  configure  user  management,  network  settings,  firewall  settings,  change  password, LDAP Server, HTTP Server, Email Settings, Time Settings, NTP server, recording storage and login timeout.  Maintenance:  To  perform  firmware  upgrade,  backup  configurations,  cleaner  setup,  reset/reboot, syslog setup and troubleshooting.  WEB GUI LANGUAGES  Currently  the  UCM6200  series  web  GUI  supports  English,  Simplified  Chinese,  Traditional  Chinese, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Russian, Italian, Polish, German and etc.  Users can select the displayed language in web GUI login page, or at the upper right of the web GUI after logging in.      Figure 9: UCM6200 Web GUI Language
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 38 of 321    SAVE AND APPLY CHANGES  Click on "Save" button after configuring the web GUI options in one page. After saving all the changes, make sure click on "Apply Changes" button on the upper right of the web page to submit all the changes. If the change requires reboot to take effect, a prompted message will pop up for you to reboot the device.  MAKE YOUR FIRST CALL  Power up the UCM6200 and your SIP end point phone. Connect both devices to the network. Then follow the steps below to make your first call.  1.  Log in the UCM6200 web GUI, go to PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions. 2.  Click on "Create New SIP Extension" to create a new extension. You will need User ID, Password and Voicemail Password information to register and use the extension later. 3.  Register the extension on your phone with the SIP User ID, SIP server and SIP Password information. The SIP server address is the UCM6200 IP address. 4.  When  your  phone  is  registered  with  the  extension,  dial  *97  to  access  the  voicemail box.  Enter  the Voicemail Password once you hear "Password" voice prompt. 5.  Once successfully logged in to the voicemail, you will be prompted with the Voice Mail Main menu. 6.  You are successfully connected to the PBX system now.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 39 of 321    SYSTEM SETTINGS  This section explains configurations for system-wide parameters on  the UCM6200. System  settings are under “Settings” tag on UCM6200 web GUI. System settings include User Management, Network Settings, Firewall,  Change  Password,  LDAP  server,  HTTP  server,  Email  settings,  Time  Settings,  NTP  Server, Recordings Storage and Login Timeout settings.  USER MANAGEMENT  User  management  is  on  web  GUI->Settings->User  Management  page.  User  could  create  multiple accounts  for  different  administrators  to  log  in  the  UCM6200  web  GUI.  Additionally,  the  system  will automatically create user accounts along with creating new extensions for extension users to login to the web UI  using  their extension  number  and password. All  existing  user accounts for  web UI  login  will be displayed on User Management page as shown in the following figure.   Figure 10: User Management Page Display  USER PRIVILEGES  Three privilege levels are supported:   Super Admin
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 40 of 321    -  This is the highest privilege. Super Admin can access all pages on UCM6200 web GUI, change configuration for all options and execute all the operations. -  Super Admin can create, edit and delete one or more users with “Admin” privilege -  Super Admin can edit and delete one or more users with “Consumer” privilege -  Super Admin can view operation logs generated by all users. -  By default, the user account “admin” is configured with “Super Admin” privilege and it’s the only user  with  “Super  Admin”  privilege.  The  User  Name  and  Privilege  level  cannot  be  changed  or deleted. -  Super  Admin  could  change  its  own  login  password  on  web  UI->Settings->Change  Password page. -  Super  Admin  could  view  operations  done  by  all  the  users  in  web  UI->Settings->User Management->Operation Log.   Admin  -  Users with “Admin” privilege can only be created by “Super Admin” user. -  “Admin” privilege users are not allowed to access the following pages: Maintenance->Upgrade Maintenance->Backup Maintenance->Cleaner Maintenance->Reset/Reboot Settings->User Management->Operation Log -  “Admin” privilege users cannot create new users for login.     Consumer  -  A user account for web UI login is created automatically by the system when a new extension is created. -  The  user  could  log  in  the  web  UI  with  the  extension  number  and  password  to  access  user information, extension configuration and CDR of that extension.  CREATE NEW WEB UI USER When logged in as Super Admin, click on    to create a new account for web UI user. The following dialog will prompt. Configure the parameters as shown in below table.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 41 of 321     Figure 11: Create New User  Table 6: User Management->Create New User User Name Configure a username to identify the user which will be required in web UI login. Letters, digits and underscore are allowed in the user name. User Password Configure a password for this user which will be required in web UI login. Letters, digits and underscore are allowed. Privilege This  is  the  role  of  the  web  UI  user.  Currently  only  “Admin”  is  supported  when Super Admin creates a new user. Department  Enter the necessary information to keep a record for this user. Fax Email Address First Name Last Name Home Number Phone Number  Once created, the Super Admin can edit the users by clicking on    or delete the user by clicking on  .  Figure 12: User Management – New Users
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 42 of 321    USER PORTAL  The user  could log  in web UI user  portal using the  extension  number and  password. When there  is an extension  created  in  the  UCM6200,  the  corresponding  user  account  for  the  extension  is  automatically created. The user portal allows limited access including user information, extension configuration and CDR information of the extension. The login username is the extension number and the password is configured by Super Admin. The following figure shows the dialog of editing the account information by Super Admin. The User Name must be the extension number and it’s not configurable.   Figure 13: Edit User Information by Super Admin  The following figure shows an example of login page using extension number 1000 as the username.  Figure 14: User Portal Login After login, the web UI displays is shown as below.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 43 of 321     Figure 15: User Portal Layout  For  the  configuration  parameter  information  in  each  page,  please  refer  to [Table  6:  User Management->Create New User] for options in User Portal->Basic Information->User Information page; please refer to [EXTENSIONS] for options in User  Portal->Basic Information->Extension page; please refer to [CDR] for User Portal->Basic Information->CDR page.  CONCURRENT MULTI-USER LOGIN  When there are multiple web UI users created, concurrent multi-user login is supported on the UCM6200. Multiple users could edit options and have configurations take effect simultaneously. However, if different users  are  editing  the  same  option  or  making  the  same  operation  (by  clicking  on  “Apply  Changes”),  a prompt will pop up as shown in the following figure.  Figure 16: Multiple User Operation Error Prompt  OPERATION LOG  Super  Admin  has  the  authority  to  view  operation  logs  on  UCM6200  web  GUI->Settings->User Management->Operation  Log  page.  Operation  logs  list  operations  done  by  all  the  web  UI  users,  for example, web UI login, creating trunk, creating outbound rule and etc. There are 6 columns to record the operation details “Date”, “User Name”, “IP Address”, “Results”, “Page Operation” and “Specific Operation”.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 44 of 321     Figure 17: Operation Logs  The operation log can be sorted and filtered for easy access. Click on the header of each column to sort. For example, clicking on "Date" will sort the logs according to operation date and time. Clicking on "Date" again will reverse the order.  Table 7: Operation Log Column Header Date The date and time when the operation is executed. User Name The username of the user who performed the operation. IP Address The IP address from which the operation is made. Results The result of the operation. Page Operation The page where the operation is made. For example, login, logout, delete user, create trunk and etc. Specific Operation Click on    to view the options and values configured by this operation.   User could also filter the operation logs by time condition, IP address and/or username. Configure these conditions and then click on .
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 45 of 321     Figure 18: Operation Logs Filter  The  above  figure  shows  an  example  that  operations  made  by  user  “support”  on  device  with  IP 192.168.40.173 from 2014-11-01 00:00 to 2014-11-06 15:38 are filtered out and displayed.  To delete operation logs, users can perform filtering first and then click on    to delete  the  filtered  result  of  operation  logs.  Or  users  can  click  on    to  delete  all operation logs at once.  CHANGE PASSWORD  After logging in the UCM6200 web UI for the first time, it is highly recommended for users to change the default password "admin" to a more complicated password for security purpose. Follow the steps below to change the Web UI access password.  1.  Go to Web UI->Settings->User Management-> Change Password page. 2.  Enter the old password first. 3.  Enter the new password and re-type the new password to confirm. The new password has to be at least 4 characters. The maximum length of the password is 30 characters. 4.  Configure the Email Address that is used when login credential is lost. 5.  Click on "Save" and the user will be automatically logged out. 6.  Once the web page comes back to the login  page again, enter the username "admin" and the new password to login.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 46 of 321     Figure 19 : Change Password  Enter Old Password Enter the Old Password for UCM6200 Enter New Password Enter the New Password for UCM6200 Retype New Password Retype the New Password for UCM6200 Email Address Configure the Email address for UCM6200. In case login credential is lost, Email address is used to retrieve login credential  CHANGE BINDNG EMAIL  UCM6200 allows user to configure binding email in case login password is lost. UCM6200 login credential will  be sent to the  designated  email  address.  The feature  can  be found under  web  UI->Settings->User Management->Change Binding Email.   Figure 20: Change Binding Email
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 47 of 321    Table 8: Change Binding Email option Enter the password of the account Enter the current login user credential for UCM6200 Email Address Email Address is used to retrieve password when password is lost   NETWORK SETTINGS    After successfully connecting the UCM6200 to the network for the first time, users could login the Web GUI and go to Settings->Network Settings to configure the network parameters for the device.  Additional network functions and settings are available for UCM6202 and UCM6204:   UCM6202/UCM6204 supports Route/Switch/Dual mode functions.  In this section, all the available network setting options are listed for  all models. Select each tab in web GUI->Settings->Network Settings page to configure LAN settings, WAN settings (UCM6202/UCM6204 only), 802.1X and Port Forwarding (UCM6202/UCM6204 only).  BASIC SETTINGS  Please refer to the following tables for basic network configuration parameters on UCM6202/UCM6204, and UCM6208 respectively.  Table 9: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Basic Settings Method Select  "Route", "Switch" or  "Dual" mode on  the network interface of UCM6200. The default setting is "Route".  Route WAN port interface will be used for uplink connection. LAN port interface will be used to serve as router.  Switch WAN port interface will be used for uplink connection. LAN port interface will be used as bridge for PC connection.  Dual Both ports can be used for uplink connection. Users will need assign LAN 1 or LAN  2  as  the  default  interface  in  option  "Default  Interface"  and  configure "Gateway IP" for this interface.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 48 of 321    Preferred DNS Server Enter the preferred DNS server address. If Preferred DNS is used, UCM will try to use it as Primary DNS server. WAN (when "Method" is set to "Route") IP Method Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. IP Address Enter the IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 192.168.0.160. Subnet Mask Enter  the  subnet  mask  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is 255.255.0.0. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 1 Enter  the  DNS  server  1  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. User Name Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Password Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS 802.1Q/VLAN Tag Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for WAN port. The default value is 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Priority Value Assign  the  priority  value  of  the  layer  2 QoS  packets  for WAN  port.  The  default value is 0. LAN (when Method is set to "Route") IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to LAN port. The default setting is 192.168.2.1. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. The default setting is 255.255.255.0. DHCP Server Enable Enable or disable DHCP server capability. The default setting is "Yes". DNS Server 1 Enter DNS server address 1. The default setting is 8.8.8.8. DNS Server 2 Enter DNS server address 2. The default setting is 208.67.222.222. Allow IP Address From Enter the DHCP IP Pool starting address. The default setting is 192.168.2.100. Allow IP Address To Enter the DHCP IP Pool ending address. The default setting is 192.168.2.254. Default IP Lease Time Enter the IP lease time (in seconds). The default setting is 43200. LAN (when Method is set to "Switch") IP Method Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. IP Address Enter the IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 192.168.0.160. Subnet Mask Enter  the  subnet  mask  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is 255.255.0.0. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 1 Enter  the  DNS  server  1  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 49 of 321    User Name Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Password Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS 802.1Q/VLAN Tag Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default value is 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Priority Value Assign  the  priority  value  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default value is 0. LAN 1 / LAN 2 (when Method is set to "Dual") Default Interface If "Dual" is selected as "Method", users will need assign the default interface to be LAN  1 (mapped  to  UCM6202  WAN  port)  or  LAN 2  (mapped  to UCM6202  LAN port) and then configure network settings for LAN 1/LAN 2. The default interface is LAN 2. IP Method Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. IP Address Enter the IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 192.168.0.160. Subnet Mask Enter  the  subnet  mask  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is 255.255.0.0. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings when the port is assigned as default interface. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 1 Enter  the  DNS  server  1  address  for  static  IP  settings.  The  default  setting  is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. User Name Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Password Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS 802.1Q/VLAN Tag Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default value is 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Priority Value Assign  the  priority  value  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default value is 0.    Table 10: UCM6208 Network Settings->Basic Settings  Preferred DNS Server Enter the preferred DNS server address. If Preferred DNS is used, UCM will try to use it as Primary DNS server. IP Method Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. IP Address Enter the IP address for static IP settings. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 50 of 321    DNS Server 1 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. User Name Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Password Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS 802.1Q/VLAN Tag Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default value is 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Priority Value Assign  the  priority  value  of  the  layer  2  QoS  packets  for  LAN  port.  The  default value is 0.   Method: Route  When  the  UCM6200  has  method  set  to  Route  in  network  settings,  WAN  port  interface  is  used  for uplink connection and LAN port interface is used as a router. Please see a sample diagram below.   Figure 21: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Route
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 51 of 321      Method: Switch  WAN  port  interface  is  used  for  uplink  connection;  LAN  port  interface  is  used  as  bridge  for  PC connection.   Figure 22: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Switch     Method: Dual  Both WAN port and LAN port are used for uplink connection. Users will need assign LAN 1 or LAN 2 as the default interface in option "Default Interface" and configure "Gateway IP" if static IP is used for this interface.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 52 of 321     Figure 23: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Dual  802.1X  IEEE  802.1X  is  an  IEEE  standard  for  port-based  network  access  control.  It  provides  an  authentication mechanism  to  device  before  the  device  is  allowed  to  access  Internet  or  other  LAN  resources.  The UCM6200 supports 802.1X as  a supplicant/client to be authenticated. The following diagram  and figure show UCM6200 uses 802.1X mode “EAP-MD5” on WAN port as client in the network to access Internet.   Figure 24: UCM6200 Using 802.1X as Client
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 53 of 321     Figure 25: UCM6200 Using 802.1X EAP-MD5  The  following  table  shows  the  configuration  parameters  for  802.1X  on  UCM6200.  Identity  and  MD5 password are required for authentication, which should be provided by the network administrator obtained from the RADIUS server. If “EAP-TLS” or “EAP-PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2” is used as the 802.1X mode, users will also need upload 802.1X CA Certificate and 802.1X Client Certificate, which should be also generated from the RADIUS server.   Table 11: UCM6200 Network Settings->802.1X 802.1X Mode Select  802.1X  mode.  The  default  setting  is  "Disable".  The  supported  802.1X mode are:   EAP-MD5   EAP-TLS   EAP-PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 Identity Enter 802.1X mode identity information. MD5 Password Enter 802.1X mode MD5 password information. 802.1X Certificate Select 802.1X certificate from local PC and then upload. 802.1X Client Certificate Select 802.1X client certificate from local PC and then upload.  STATIC ROUTES  The UCM6200 provides users static routing capability that allows the device to use manually configured routes,  rather  than  information  only  from  dynamic  routing  or  gateway  configured  in  the  UCM6200  web GUI->Network Settings->Basic Settings to forward traffic. It can be used to define a route when no other routes are available or necessary, or used in complementary with existing routing on the UCM6200 as a failover backup, and etc.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 54 of 321      Click on    to create a new static route. The configuration parameters are listed in the table below.   Once added, users can select    to edit the static route.   Select    to delete the static route.  Table 12: UCM6200 Network Settings->Static Routes Destination Configure  the  destination  IP  address  or  the  destination  IP  subnet  for  the UCM6200 to reach using the static route.  Example: IP address - 192.168.66.4 IP subnet - 192.168.66.0 Netmask Configure  the  subnet  mask  for  the  above  destination  address.  If  left  blank,  the default value is 255.255.255.255.  Example: 255.255.255.0 Gateway Configure the gateway address so that the UCM6200 can reach the destination via this gateway. Gateway address is optional.    Example: 192.168.40.5 Interface Specify the network interface on the UCM6200 to reach the destination using the static route.  LAN interface is eth0; WAN interface is eth1.    Static routes configuration can be reset from LCD menu->Network Menu.  The following diagram shows a sample application of static route usage on UCM6204.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 55 of 321     Figure 26: UCM6204 Static Route Sample  The network topology of the above diagram is as below:    Network 192.168.69.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6204 LAN 1 address   Network 192.168.40.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6204 LAN 2 address   Network 192.168.66.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6204 via VPN   Network 192.168.40.0 has VPN connection established with network 192.168.66.0  In this network, by default the IP phones in network 192.168.69.0 are unable to call IP phones in network 192.168.66.0  when registered on  different interfaces on the  UCM6204.  Therefore,  we need configure a static route on the UCM6204 so that the phones in isolated networks can make calls between each other.   Figure 27: UCM6204 Static Route Configuration
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 56 of 321    PORT FORWORDING  The UCM network interface supports router function which provides users the ability to do port forwarding. If  the  UCM6202/UCM6204  LAN  mode  is  set  to  "Route"  under  web  GUI->Settings->Network Settings->Basic Settings page, port forwarding is available for configuration.  The  port  forwarding  configuration  is  under  web  GUI->Settings->Network  Settings->Port  Forwarding page. Please see related settings in the table below.  Table 13: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Port Forwarding WAN Port Specify  the  WAN  port  number  or  a  range  of  WAN  ports.  Up  to  8  ports  can  be configured.  Note: When it is set to a range,  WAN port and  LAN port must be configured  with  the same range, such as WAN port: 1000-1005 and LAN port: 1000-1005, and access from WAN port will be forwarded to the LAN port with the same port number, for example, WAN port 1000 will be port forwarding to LAN port 1000. LAN IP Specify the LAN IP address. LAN Port Specify the LAN port number or a range of LAN ports.  Note: When it is set to a range,  WAN port and  LAN port must be configured  with  the same range, such as WAN port: 1000-1005 and LAN port: 1000-1005, and access from WAN port will be forwarded to the LAN port with the same port number, for example, WAN port 1000 will be port forwarding to LAN port 1000. Protocol Type Select protocol type "UDP Only", "TCP Only" or "TCP/UDP" for the forwarding in the selected port. The default setting is "UDP Only".  The following figures demonstrate a port forwarding example to provide phone’s web UI access to public side.    The UCM6202/UCM6204 network mode is set to “Route”   The UCM6202/UCM6204 WAN port is connected to uplink switch, with a public IP address configured, e.g. 1.1.1.1.   The UCM6202/UCM6204 LAN port provides DHCP pool that connects to multiple phone devices in the LAN network 192.168.2.x. The UCM6202/UCM6204 is used as a router, with gateway address 192.168.2.1
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 57 of 321      There is a GXP2160 connected under the LAN interface network of the UCM6202/UCM6204. It obtains IP address 192.168.2.100 from UCM6200 DHCP pool   On the UCM6202/UCM6204 web UI->Settings->Network Settings->Port Forwarding, configure a port forwarding entry as the figure shows below. WAN Port: This is the port opened up on the WAN side for access purpose. LAN IP: This is the GXP2160 IP address, under the LAN interface network of the UCM6202/UCM6204. Protocol Type: We select TCP here for web UI access using HTTP.   Figure 28: UCM6202/UCM6204 Port Forwarding Configuration  This will allow users to access the GXP2160 web UI from public side, by typing in address “1.1.1.1:8088”.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 58 of 321     Figure 29: GXP2160 Web Access Using UCM6202 Port Forwarding  DDNS SETTINGS  DDNS setting allows user to access UCM6200 via domain name instead of IP address.   The UCM supports DDNS service from the following DDNS provider:    dydns.org   noip.com   freedns.afraid.org   zoneedit.com   oray.net  Here is an example of using noip.com for DDNS.  1.  Register domain in DDNS service provider. Please note the UCM6200 needs to have public IP access.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 59 of 321     Figure 30: Register Domain Name on noip.com  2.  On  web  UI->Settings->Network  Settings->DDNS  Settings,  enable  DDNS  service  and  configure username, password and host name.     Figure 31: UCM6200 DDNS Setting  3.  Now you can use domain name instead of IP address to connect to the UCM6200 web UI.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 60 of 321     Figure 32: Using Domain Name to Connect to UCM6200  FIREWALL  The UCM6200 provides users firewall configurations to prevent certain malicious attack to the UCM6200 system. Users could configure to allow, restrict or reject specific traffic through the device for security and bandwidth  purpose.  The  UCM6200  also  provides  Fail2ban  feature  for  authentication  errors  in  SIP REGISTER,  INVITE  and  SUBSCRIBE.  To  configure  firewall  settings  in  the  UCM6200,  go  to  Web UI->Settings->Firewall page.  STATIC DEFENSE  Under Web GUI->Settings->Firewall->Static Defense page, users will see the following information:    Current service information with port, process and type.   Typical firewall settings.   Custom firewall settings.  The following table shows a sample current service status running on the UCM6200.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 61 of 321    Table 14: UCM6200 Firewall->Static Defense->Current Service Port Process Type Protocol or Service 7777 Asterisk tcp/IPv4 SIP 389 Slapd tcp/IPv4 LDAP 22 Dropbear tcp/IPv4 SSH 80 Lighthttpd tcp/IPv4 HTTP 8089 Lighthttpd tcp/IPv4 HTTPS 69 Opentftpd udp/IPv4 TFTP 9090 Asterisk udp/IPv4 SIP 6060 zero_config udp/IPv4 UCM6200 zero_config service 5060 Asterisk udp/IPv4 SIP 4569 Asterisk udp/IPv4 SIP 5353 zero_config udp/IPv4 UCM6200 zero_config service 37435 Syslogd udp/IPv4 Syslog  For typical firewall settings, users could configure the following options on the UCM6200.  Table 15: Typical Firewall Settings Ping Defense Enable If  enabled,  ICMP  response  will  not  be  allowed  for  Ping  request.  The  default setting is disabled. To enable or disable it, click on the check box for the LAN or WAN (UCM6202/UCM6204) interface. Ping-of-Death Defense Enable Enable  to  prevent  Ping-of-Death  attack  to  the  device.  The  default  setting  is disabled. To enable or disable it, click on the check box for the LAN or WAN (UCM6202/UCM6204) interface.  Under  "Custom  Firewall  Settings",  users  could  create  new  rules  to  accept,  reject  or  drop  certain  traffic going through the UCM6200. To create new rule, click on "Create New Rule" button and a new window will pop up for users to specify rule options.  Right next to "Create New Rule" button, there is a checkbox for option "Reject Rules". If it’s checked, all the rules will be rejected except the firewall rules listed below. In the firewall rules, only when there is a rule that meets all the following requirements, the option "Reject Rules" will be allowed to check:    Action: "Accept"   Type "In"   Destination port is set to the system login port (e.g., by default 8089)   Protocol is not UDP
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 62 of 321     Figure 33: Create New Firewall Rule  Table 16: Firewall Rule Settings Rule Name Specify the Firewall rule name to identify the firewall rule. Action Select the action for the Firewall to perform.   ACCEPT   REJECT   DROP Type Select the traffic type.  IN If selected, users will need specify the network interface "LAN" or "WAN" (for UCM6202/UCM6204) for the incoming traffic.   OUT Service Select the service type.   FTP  SSH   Telnet   TFTP   HTTP   LDAP   Custom If  "Custom"  is  selected,  users  will  need  specify  Source  (IP  and  port), Destination (IP and port) and Protocol (TCP, UDP or Both) for the service. Please note if the source or the destination field is left blank, it will be used as "Anywhere".  Save  the  change  and  click  on  "Apply"  button.  Then  submit  the  configuration  by  clicking  on  "Apply Changes" on the upper right of the web page. The new rule will be listed at the bottom of the page with sequence number, rule name, action, protocol, type, source, destination and operation. More  operations below:
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 63 of 321      Click on    to edit the rule   Click on    to delete the rule  DYNAMIC DEFENSE  Dynamic defense is supported on the UCM6200 series. It can blacklist hosts dynamically when the LAN mode is set to "Route" under web GUI->Settings->Network Settings->Basic Settings page. If enabled, the traffic coming into the UCM6200 can be monitored, which helps prevent massive connection attempts or brute force attacks to the device. The blacklist can be created and updated by the UCM6200 firewall, which  will  then  be  displayed  in  the  web  page.  Please  refer  to  the  following  table  for  dynamic  defense options on the UCM6200. Table 17: UCM6200 Firewall Dynamic Defense Dynamic Defense Enable Enable dynamic defense. The default setting is disabled. Periodical Time Interval Configure  the  dynamic  defense  periodic  time  interval  (in  minutes).  If  the number  of  TCP  connections  from  a  host  exceeds  the  connection  threshold within  this  period,  this  host  will  be  added  into  Blacklist.  The  valid  value  is between 1 and 59 when dynamic defense is turned on. The default setting is 59. Blacklist Update Interval Configure the blacklist update time interval (in seconds). The default setting is 120. Connection Threshold Configure the connection threshold. Once the number of connections from the same host reaches the threshold, it will be added into the blacklist. The default setting is 100. Dynamic Defense Whitelist Configure the dynamic defense whitelist.  For example, 192.168.1.3 192.168.1.4  The following figure shows a configuration example like this:    If a host at IP address 192.168.40.7 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM6200 within 1 minute, it will be added into UCM6200 blacklist.   This host 192.168.40.7 will be blocked by the UCM6200 for 300 seconds.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 64 of 321      Since IP address 192.168.40.5 is in whitelist, if the host at IP address 192.168.40.5 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM6200 within 1 minute, it will not be added into UCM6200 blacklist. It can still establish TCP connection with the UCM6200.   Figure 34: Configure Dynamic Defense  FAIL2BAN  Fail2Ban feature on the UCM6200 provides intrusion detection and prevention for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER, INVITE  and SUBSCRIBE. Once the entry is detected within "Max Retry Duration", the UCM6200 will take action to forbid the host for certain period as defined in "Banned Duration". This feature helps prevent SIP brute force attacks to the PBX system.  Table 18: Fail2Ban Settings Global Settings Enable Fail2Ban Enable Fail2Ban. The default setting is disabled. Please make sure both "Enable Fail2Ban" and "Asterisk Service" are turned on in order to use Fail2Ban for SIP authentication on the UCM6200. Banned Duration Configure  the  duration  (in  seconds)  for  the  detected  host  to  be  banned.  The default setting is 300. If set to -1, the host will be always banned. Max Retry Duration Within  this  duration  (in  seconds),  if  a  host  exceeds  the  max  times  of  retry  as defined in "MaxRetry", the host will be banned. The default setting is 5. MaxRetry Configure  the  number  of  authentication  failures  during  "Max  Retry  Duration" before the host is banned. The default setting is 10. Fail2Ban Whitelist Configure IP address, CIDR mask or DNS host in the whiltelist. Fail2Ban will not
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 65 of 321    ban the host with matching address in this list. Up to 5 addresses can be added into the list. Local Settings Asterisk Service Enable Asterisk service for Fail2Ban. The default setting is disabled. Please make sure both "Enable Fail2Ban" and "Asterisk Service" are turned on in order to use Fail2Ban for SIP authentication on the UCM6200. Protocol Configure the listening port number for the service. Currently only 5060 (for UDP) is supported. MaxRetry Configure  the  number  of  authentication  failures  during  "Max  Retry  Duration" before the host is banned. The default setting is 10. Please make sure this option is  properly  configured  as  it  will  override  the  "MaxRetry"  value  under  "Global Settings".     LDAP SERVER  The UCM6200 has an embedded LDAP server for users to manage corporate phonebook in a centralized manner.    By  default,  the  LDAP  server  has  generated  the  first  phonebook  with  PBX  DN "ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com" based on the UCM6200 user extensions already.   Users  could  add  new  phonebook  with  a  different  Phonebook  DN  for  other  external  contacts.  For example, "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com".   All the phonebooks in the UCM6200 LDAP server have the same Base DN "dc=pbx,dc=com".  Term Explanation:   cn= Common Name ou= Organization Unit dc= Domain Component These are all parts of the LDAP data Interchange Format, according to RFC 2849, which is how the LDAP tree is filtered.  If users have the Grandstream phone provisioned by the UCM6200, the LDAP directory will be set up on the phone and can be used right away for users to access all phonebooks.  Additionally,  users  could  manually  configure  the  LDAP  client  settings  to  manipulate  the  built-in  LDAP server  on  the  UCM6200.  If  the  UCM6200  has  multiple  LDAP  phonebooks  created,  in  the  LDAP  client configuration, users  could use  "dc=pbx,dc=com"  as Base DN  to have access to  all phonebooks  on the
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 66 of 321    UCM6200  LDAP server, or  use a specific phonebook  DN,  for  example  "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com", to access to phonebook with Phonebook DN "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com " only.  UCM can also act as a LDAP client to download phonebook entries from other LDAP server.  To access LDAP server and client settings, go to Web GUI->Settings->LDAP Server.  LDAP SERVER CONFIGURATIONS  The following figure shows the default LDAP server configurations on the UCM6200.   Figure 35: LDAP Server Configurations  The UCM6200 LDAP server supports anonymous access (read-only) by default. Therefore the LDAP client doesn't have to configure username and password to access the phonebook directory. The "Root DN" and "Root  Password"  here  are  for  LDAP management  and  configuration  where  users  will  need  provide  for authentication purpose before modifying the LDAP information. The default phonebook list in this LDAP server can be viewed and edited by clicking on    for the first phonebook under LDAP Phonebook.   Figure 36: Default LDAP Phonebook DN
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 67 of 321     Figure 37: Default LDAP Phonebook Attributes  LDAP PHONEBOOK  Users  could  use  the  default  phonebook,  edit  the  default  phonebook,  add  new  phonebook,  import phonebook on the LDAP server as well as export phonebook from the LDAP server. The first phonebook with default phonebook dn "ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com" displayed on the LDAP server page is for extensions in this PBX. Users cannot add or delete contacts directly. The contacts information will need to be modified via  Web  GUI->PBX->Basic/Call  Routes->Extensions  first.  The  default  LDAP  phonebook  will  then  be updated automatically.   Figure 38: LDAP Server->LDAP Phonebook
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 68 of 321      Add new phonebook  A  new  sibling  phonebook  of  the  default  PBX  phonebook  can  be  added  by clicking  on  "Add"  under "LDAP Phonebook" section.   Figure 39: Add LDAP Phonebook  Configure the "Phonebook Prefix" first. The "Phonebook DN" will be automatically filled in. For example, if configuring  "Phonebook  Prefix"  as  "people",  the  "Phonebook  DN"  will  be  filled  with "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com".  Once added, users can select    to edit the phonebook attributes and contact list (see figure below), or select    to delete the phonebook.  Figure 40: Edit LDAP Phonebook
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 69 of 321     Import phonebook from your computer to LDAP server  Click on “Import Phonebook” and a dialog will prompt as shown in the figure below.   Figure 41: Import Phonebook  The file to be imported must be a CSV file with UTF-8 encoding. Users can open the CSV file with Notepad and save it with UTF-8 encoding.  Here is how a sample file looks like. Please note “Account Number” and “Phonebook DN” fields are required. Users could export a phonebook file from the UCM6200 LDAP phonebook section first and use it as a sample to start with.  Figure 42: Phonebook CSV File Format  The Phonebook DN field is the same “Phonebook Prefix” entry as when the user clicks on “Add” to create a  new phonebook.  Therefore,  if the user  enters “phonebook” in  “Phonebook DN”  field in the CSV file, the actual phonebook DN “ou=phonebook,dc=pbx,dc=com” will be automatically created by the UCM6200 once the CSV file is imported.  In the CSV file, users can specify different phonebook DN fields for different contacts. If the phonebook DN already exists on the UCM6200 LDAP Phonebook, the contacts in the CSV file will be added into the existing phonebook. If the phonebook DN doesn’t exist on the UCM6200 LDAP Phonebook, a new phonebook with this phonebook DN will be created.  The sample phonebook CSV file in above picture will result in the following LDAP phonebook in the
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 70 of 321    UCM6200.  Figure 43: LDAP Phonebook After Import  As  the  default  LDAP  phonebook  with  DN  “ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com”  cannot  be  edited  or  deleted  in LDAP phonebook section, users cannot import contacts with Phonebook DN field “pbx” if existed in the CSV file.   Export phonebook to your computer from UCM6200 LDAP server  Select  the  checkbox  for  the  LDAP  phonebook  and  then  click  on  “Export  Selected  Phonebook”  to export the selected phonebook. The exported phonebook can be used as a record or a sample CSV file for the users to add more contacts in it and import to the UCM6200 again.  Figure 44: Export Selected LDAP Phonebook  LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS  The  configuration  on  LDAP  client  is  similar  when  you  use  other  LDAP  servers.  Here  we  provide  an example on how to configure the LDAP client on the SIP end points to use the default PBX phonebook.  Assuming  the  server  base  dn  is  "dc=pbx,dc=com",  configure  the  LDAP  clients  as  follows  (case insensitive): Server Address: LDAP server IP address
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 71 of 321    Base DN: dc=pbx,dc=com User Name: cn= “LDAP server login name”, dc=pbx, dc=com [matching LDAP server format] Password: “LDAP server login password” Filter: (|(CallerIDName=%)(AccountNumber=%)) Port: 389  The following figure gives a sample configurations for UCM6200 acting as a LDAP client.   Figure 45: LDAP Client Configurations  To configure Grandstream IP phones as the LDAP client, please refer to the following example:  Server Address: The IP address or domain name of the UCM6200 Base DN: dc=pbx,dc=com User Name: Please leave this field empty Password: Please leave this field empty LDAP Name Attribute: CallerIDName Email Department FirstName LastName LDAP Number Attribute: AccountNumber MobileNumber HomeNumber Fax LDAP Number Filter: (AccountNumber=%) LDAP Name Filter: (CallerIDName=%) LDAP Display Name: AccountNumber CallerIDName LDAP Version: If existed, please select LDAP Version 3 Port: 389  The following figure shows the configuration information on a Grandstream GXP2200 to successfully use the LDAP server as configured in Figure 35: LDAP Server Configurations.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 72 of 321     Figure 46: GXP2200 LDAP Phonebook Configuration  HTTP SERVER  The UCM6200 embedded web server responds to HTTP/HTTPS GET/POST requests. Embedded HTML pages allow the users to configure the PBX through a Web browser such as Microsoft IE, Mozilla Firefox and  Google  Chrome.  By  default,  the  PBX  can  be  accessed  via  HTTPS  using  Port  8089  (e.g., https://192.168.40.50:8089).  Users  could  also  change  the  access  protocol  and  port  as  preferred  under Web GUI->Settings->HTTP Server.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 73 of 321    Table 19: HTTP Server Settings Redirect From Port 80 Enable or disable redirect from port 80. On the PBX, the default access protocol is HTTPS and the default port number is 8089. When this option is  enabled,  the  access  using  HTTP  with  Port  80  will  be  redirected  to HTTPS with Port 8089. The default setting is "Enable". Protocol Type Select HTTP or HTTPS. The default setting is "HTTPS". This is also the protocol used for zero config when the end point device downloads  the config file from the UCM6200. Port Specify port number to access the HTTP server. The default port number is 8089.  Once the change is saved, the web page will be redirected to the login page using the new URL. Enter the username and password to login again.  EMAIL SETTINGS  The Email application on the UCM6200 can be used to send out alert event Emails, Fax (Fax-To-Email), Voicemail  (Voicemail-To-Email)  and  etc.  The  configuration  parameters  can  be  accessed  via  Web GUI->Settings->Email Settings. Table 20: Email Settings TLS Enable Enable or disable TLS during transferring/submitting your Email to other SMTP server. The default setting is "Yes". Type Select Email type.   MTA: Mail Transfer Agent. The Email will be sent from the configured domain.  When  MTA  is  selected,  there  is  no  need  to  set  up  SMTP server  for  it  or  no  user  login  is  required.  However,  the  Emails  sent from MTA might be considered as spam by the target SMTP server.   Client: Submit Emails to the SMTP server. A SMTP server is required and users need login with correct credentials. Domain Specify the domain name to be used in the Email when using type "MTA". Server Specify the SMTP server when using type "Client". Username Username  is  required  when  using  type  "Client".  Normally  it's  the  Email address. Password Password  to  login  for  the  above  Username  (Email  address)  is  required when using type "Client". Display Name Specify the display name in the FROM header in the Email. Sender Specify the sender's Email address. For example, pbx@example.mycompany.com.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 74 of 321    The  following  figure  shows  a  sample  Email  settings  on  the  UCM6200,  assuming  the  Email  is  using smtp.gmail.com as the SMTP server.   Figure 47: UCM6200 Email Settings  Once the configuration is finished, click on "Test". In the prompt, fill in a valid Email address to send a test Email to verify the Email settings on the UCM6200.  TIME SETTINGS AUTO TIME UPDATING  The current system time on the UCM6200 is displayed on the upper right of the web page. It can also be found under Web GUI->Status->System Status->General.  To  configure  the  UCM6200  to  update  time  automatically,  go  to  Web  GUI->Settings->Time Settings->Time Auto Updating.   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: The  configurations  under  Web  GUI->Settings->Time  Settings->Time  Auto  Updating  page  require reboot to take effect. Please consider configuring auto time updating related changes when setting up the UCM6200 for the first time to avoid service interrupt after installation and deployment in production. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 75 of 321    Table 21: Time Auto Updating Remote NTP Server Specify  the  URL  or  IP  address  of  the  NTP  server  for  the  UCM6200  to synchronize  the  date  and  time.  The  default  NTP  server  is ntp.ipvideotalk.com. Enable DHCP Option 2 If set to "Yes", the UCM6200 is allowed to get provisioned for Time Zone from DHCP Option 2 in the local server automatically. The default setting is "Yes". Enable DHCP Option 42 If set to "Yes", the UCM6200 is allowed to get provisioned for NTP Server from DHCP Option 42 in the local server automatically. This will override the manually configured NTP Server. The default setting is "Yes". Time Zone Select the proper time zone option so the UCM6200 can display correct time accordingly.  If  "Self-Defined  Tome  Zone"  is  selected,  please  specify  the  time  zone parameters  in  "Self-Defined  Time  Zone"  field  as  described  in  below option. Self-Defined Time Zone If "Self-Defined Time Zone" is selected in "Time Zone" option, users will need define their own time zone following the format below.    The syntax is: std offset dst [offset], start [/time], end [/time]    Default is set to: MTZ+6MDT+5,M4.1.0,M11.1.0  MTZ+6MDT+5 This indicates a time zone with 6 hours offset and 1 hour ahead for DST, which is U.S central time. If it is positive (+), the local time zone is west of the  Prime Meridian  (A.K.A:  International  or Greenwich  Meridian);  If it is negative (-), the local time zone is east.    M4.1.0,M11.1.0   The 1st number indicates Month: 1,2,3.., 12 (for Jan, Feb, .., Dec). The 2nd number indicates the nth iteration of the weekday: (1st Sunday,   3rd Tuesday…). Normally 1, 2, 3, 4 are used. If 5 is used, it means the last iteration of the weekday. The  3rd  number  indicates  weekday:  0,1,2,..,6  (  for  Sun,  Mon,   Tues, ... ,Sat). Therefore, this example is the DST which starts from the First Sunday of   April to the 1st Sunday of November.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 76 of 321    SET TIME MANUALLY  To manually set the time on the UCM6200, go to Web UI->Settings->Time Settings->Set Time Manually. The format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MI:SS.   Figure 48: Set Time Manually    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  Note: Manually setup time will take effect immediately after saving and applying change in the web UI. If users would like to reboot the UCM6200 and keep the manually setup time setting, please make sure "Remote NTP  Server",  "Enable  DHCP  Option  2"  and  "Enable  DHCP  Option  42"  options  under  Web GUI->Settings->Time Settings->Time Auto Updating page are unchecked or set to empty. Otherwise, time auto updating settings in this page will take effect after reboot. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------   OFFICE TIME  On the UCM6200, the system administrator can define "office time", which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding schedule and inbound rule schedule. To configure office time, go to Web UI->Settings->Time Settings->Office Time. Click on "Create New Office Time" to create an office time.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 77 of 321     Figure 49: Create New Office Time   Table 22: Create New Office Time Start Time Configure the start time for office hour. End Time Configure the end time for office hour Week Select the work days in one week. Show Advanced Options Check  this  options  to  show  advanced  options.  Once  selected,  please specify "Month" and "Day" below. Month Select the months for office time. Day Select the work days in one month.     Select "Start Time", "End Time" and the day for the "Week" for the office time. The system administrator can also define month and day of the month as advanced options. Once done, click on "Save" and then "Apply Change" for the office time to take effect. The office time will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 78 of 321     Figure 50: Settings->Time Settings->Office Time   Click on    to edit the office time.   Click on    to delete the office time.   Click on "Delete Selected Office Times" to delete multiple selected office times at once.  HOLIDAY  On  the  UCM6200,  the  system  administrator  can  define  "holiday",  which  can  be  used  to  configure  time condition  for extension call forwarding schedule  and  inbound  rule schedule. To configure holiday,  go to Web UI->Settings->Time Settings->Holiday. Click on "Create New Holiday" to create holiday time.  Figure 51: Create New Holiday
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 79 of 321    Table 23: Create New Holiday Name Specify the holiday name to identify this holiday. Holiday Memo Create a note for the holiday. Month Select the month for the holiday. Day Select the day for the holiday. Show Advanced Options Check this option to show advanced options. If selected, please specify the days as holiday in one week below. Week   Select the days as holiday in one week.  Enter  holiday  "Name"  and  "Holiday  Memo"  for  the  new  holiday.  Then  select  "Month"  and  "Day".  The system administrator can also define days in one week as advanced options. Once done, click on "Save" and then "Apply Change" for the holiday to take effect. The holiday will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below.   Figure 52: Settings->Time Settings->Holiday   Click on    to edit the holiday.   Click on    to delete the holiday.   Click on "Delete Selected Holidays" to delete multiple selected holidays at once.    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: For more details on how to use office time and holiday, please refer to the link below: http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/How_to_use_office_time_and_holiday_UCM6200.pdf ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 80 of 321    NTP SERVER  The  UCM6200  can  be  used  as  a  NTP  server  for  the  NTP  clients  to  synchronize  their  time  with.  To configure  the  UCM6200  as  the  NTP  server,  set  "Enable  NTP  server"  to  "Yes"  under  web GUI->Settings->NTP  Server.  On  the  client  side,  point  the  NTP  server  address  to  the  UCM6200  IP address or host name to use the UCM6200 as the NTP server.  RECORDINGS STORAGE  The UCM6200 supports call recordings automatically or manually and the recording files can be saved in external storage plugged in the UCM6200 or on the UCM6200 locally. To manage the recording storage, users can go to UCM6200 web GUI->Settings->Recordings Storage page and select whether to store the recording files in USB Disk, SD card or locally on the UCM6200.   Figure 53: Settings->Recordings Storage   If  “Enable Auto  Change”  is selected,  the recording files  will be  automatically saved  in the  available USB Disk or SD card plugged into the UCM6200. If both USB Disk and SD card are plugged in, the recording files will be always saved in the USB Disk.   If “Local” is selected, the recordings will be stored in UCM6200 internal storage.   If “USB Disk” or “SD Card” is selected, the recordings will be stored in the corresponding plugged in external storage device. Please note the options “USB Disk” and “SD Card” will be displayed only if they are plugged into the UCM6200.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 81 of 321    Once “USB Disk” or “SD Card” is selected, click on “OK”. The user will be prompted to confirm to copy the local files to the external storage device.     Figure 54: Recordings Storage Prompt Information  Click on “OK” to continue. The users will be prompted a new dialog to select the categories for the files to be copied over.  Figure 55: Recording Storage Category  On the UCM6200, recording files are generated and exist in 3 categories: normal call recording files, conference recording files, and call queue recording files. Therefore users have the following options when select the categories to copy the files to the external device:  -  Recording Files: Copy the normal recording files to the external device. -  Conference: Copy the conference recording files to the external device. -  Queue: Copy the call queue recording files to the external device. -  All: Copy all recording files to the external device.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 82 of 321    LOGIN TIMEOUT SETTINGS  After the user logs in the UCM6200 web UI, the user will be automatically logged out after certain timeout. This timeout value can be specified under UCM100 web GUI->Settings->Login Timeout Settings page.  The “User Login Timeout” value is in minute and the default setting is 10 minutes. If the user doesn’t make any operation on web UI within the timeout, the user will be logged out automatically. After that, the web UI will be redirected to the login page and the user will need to enter username and password to log in.  If set to 0, there is no timeout for the web UI login session and the user will not be automatically logged out.   Figure 56: Login Timeout Settings
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 83 of 321    GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT  UCM6200  now  supports  Google  OAuth  2.0  authentication.  This  feature  is  used  for  supporting  UCM6200 conference scheduling system. Once OAuth 2.0 is enabled, UCM6200 conference system can access Google calendar to schedule or update conference. Google  Service  Settings  can  be  found  under  web  GUI->  Settings->  Google  Service  Settings->  Google Service Settings.    Figure 57: Google Service Settings->OAuth2.0 Authentication  If you already have OAuth2.0 project set up on Google Developers web page, please use your existing login credential for “OAuth2.0 Client ID” and “OAuth2.0 Client Secret” in the above figure for the UCM6200 to access Google Service.  If you do not have OAuth2.0 project set up yet, please following the steps below to create new project and obtain credentials:  1.  Go to Google Developers page https://console.developers.google.com/start Create a New Project in Google Developers page.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 84 of 321     Figure 58: Google Service->New Project  2.  Enable Calendar API from API Library.   3.  Click “Credentials” on the left drop down menu to create new OAuth2.0 login credentials.     Figure 59: Google Service->Create New Credential  4.  Use the newly created login credential to fill in “OAuth2.0 Client ID” and “OAuth2.0 Client Secret”.   5.  Click “Get Authentication Code” to obtain authentication code from Google Service.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 85 of 321     Figure 60: Google Service->OAuth2.0 Login  6.  Now UCM6200 is connected with Google Service.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 86 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 87 of 321    PROVISIONING OVERVIEW  Grandstream  SIP Devices  can be configured  via Web interface as well  as via configuration file through TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS  download.  All  Grandstream  SIP  devices  support  a  proprietary  binary  format configuration file and XML format configuration file. The UCM6200 provides a Plug and Play mechanism to auto-provision the Grandstream SIP devices in a zero configuration manner by generating XML config file and having the phone to download it within LAN area. This allows users to finish the installation with ease and start using the SIP devices in a managed way.  To provision a phone, three steps are involved, i.e., discovery, configuration and provisioning. This section explains how Zero Config works on the UCM6200. The settings for this feature can be accessed via Web UI->PBX->Zero Config.  CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE FOR END POINT DEVICE  Started from firmware version 1.0.7.10, the end point device configuration in zero config is divided into the following three layers with priority from the lowest to the highest:    Global This  is  the  lowest  layer.  Users  can  configure  the  most  basic  options  that  could  apply  to  all Grandstream SIP devices during provisioning via Zero config.    Model In this layer, users can define model-specific options for the configuration template.    Device   This is the highest layer. Users can configure device-specific options for the configuration for individual device here.  Each layer also has its own structure in different levels. Please see figure below. The details for each layer are  explained  in  sections  [GLOBAL  CONFIGURATION],  [MODEL  CONFIGURATION]  and  [DEVICE CONFIGURATION].
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 88 of 321     Figure 61: Zero Config Configuration Architecture for End Point Device  The configuration options in model layer and device layer have all the option in global layers already, i.e., the options in global layer is a subset of the options in model layer and device layer. If an option is set in all three layers with different values, the highest layer value will override the value in lower layer. For example, if  the  user  selects  English  for  Language  setting  in  Global  Policy  and  Spanish  for  Language  setting  in Default Model Template, the language setting on the device to be provisioned will use Spanish as model layer  has  higher  priority  than  global  layer.  To  sum  up,  configurations  in  higher  layer  will  always override the configurations for  the same  options/fields in  the lower  layer  when presented  at the same time.  After understanding the zero config configuration architecture, users could configure the available options for  end  point  devices  to  be  provisioned  by  the  UCM6200  by  going  through  the  three  layers.  This configuration architecture allows users to set up and manage the Grandstream end point devices in the same LAN area in a centralized way.  AUTO PROVISIONING SETTINGS  By default, the Zero Config feature is enabled on the UCM6200 for auto provisioning. Three methods of auto provisioning are used.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 89 of 321     Figure 62: UCM6200 Zero Config    SIP SUBSCRIBE  When  the  phone  boots  up,  it  sends  out  SUBSCRIBE  to  a  multicast  IP  address  in  the  LAN.  The UCM6200 discovers it and then sends a NOTIFY with the XML config file URL in the message body. The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM6200 and take the new configuration.   DHCP OPTION 66  This method should be used on the UCM6202/UCM6204 because only the UCM6202/UCM6204 have WAN and LAN port with LAN port supporting the router function. When the phone restarts (by default DHCP Option 66 is turned on), it will send out a DHCP DISCOVER request. The UCM6202 receives it and  returns  DHCP  OFFER  with  the  config  server  path  URL  in  Option  66,  for  example, https://192.168.2.1:8089/zccgi/. The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM6200.   mDNS
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 90 of 321    When the phone boots up, it sends out mDNS query to get the TFTP server address. The UCM6200 will respond with its own address. The phone will then send TFTP request to download the XML config file from the UCM6200.  To start the auto provisioning process, under Web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config Settings, fill in the auto provision information.  Figure 63: Auto Provision Settings  Table 24: Auto Provision Settings Enable Zero Config Enable or disable the zero config feature on the PBX. The default setting is enabled. Enable Automatic Configuration Assignment By  default,  this  is  disabled.  If  disabled,  when  SIP  device  boots up,  the UCM6200 will not send the SIP device the URL to download the config file and therefore the SIP device will not be automatically provisioned by the UCM6200.  Note: When disabled, SIP devices can still be provisioned by manually sending NOTIFY from the UCM6200 which will include the XML config file URL for the SIP device to download. Automatically Assign Extension If  enabled,  when  the  device  is  discovered,  the  PBX  will  automatically assign an  extension  within the  range defined  in "Zero Config Extension Segment" to the device. The default setting is disabled. Zero Config Extension Click  on  the  link  "Zero  Config  Extension  Segment"  to  specify  the
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 91 of 321    Segment extension  range  to  be  assigned  if  "Automatically  Assign  Extension"  is enabled.  The  default  range  is  5000-6299.  Zero  Config  Extension Segment  range  can  be  defined  in  web  UI->PBX->Internal Options->General page->Extension Preference section: "Auto Provision Extensions". Enable Pick Extension If enabled, the extension list will be sent out to the device after receiving the  device's  request.  This  feature  is  for  the  GXP  series  phones  that support  selecting  extension  to  be  provisioned  via  phone's  LCD.  The default setting is disabled. Pick Extension Segment Click on the link "Pick Extension Segment" to specify the extension list to be sent to the device. The default range is 4000 to 4999. Pick Extension Segment  range  can  be  defined  in  web  UI->PBX->Internal Options->General  page->Extension  Preference  section:  "Pick Extensions". Pick Extension Period (hour): Specify the number of minutes to allow the phones being provisioned to pick extensions.   Please make sure an extension is manually assigned to the phone or "Automatically Assign Extension" is enabled during provisioning. After the configuration on the UCM6200 web GUI, click on "Save" and "Apply Changes".  Once  the  phone  boots  up  and  picks  up  the  config  file  from  the  UCM6200,  it  will  take  the configuration right away.  DISCOVERY  Users could manually discover the device by specifying the IP address or scanning the entire LAN network. Three methods are supported to scan the devices.    PING   ARP   SIP Message (NOTIFY)  Click on "Auto Discover" under web UI-> PBX-> Zero Config->Zero Config, fill in the "Scan Method" and "Scan IP". The IP address segment will be automatically filled in based on the network mask detected on the UCM6200. If users need scan the entire network segment, enter 255  (for example, 192.168.40.255) instead of  a specific IP  address.  Then click  on "Save"  to  start discovering the  devices  within the  same network. To successfully discover the devices, "Zero Config" needs to be enabled on the UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Auto Provisioning Settings.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 92 of 321     Figure 64: Auto Discover  The  following  figure  shows  a  list  of  discovered  phones.  The  MAC  address,  IP  Address,  Extension  (if assigned),  Version,  Vendor,  Model, Connection  Status, Create Config,  Options  (Edit/Delete/Update) are displayed in the list.   Figure 65: Discovered Devices  GLOBAL CONFIGURATION GLOBAL POLICY  Global configuration will apply to all the connected Grandstream SIP end point devices in the same LAN with the UCM6200 no matter what the Grandstream device model it is. It is divided into two levels:    Web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy   Web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Templates.  Global Templates configuration has higher priority to Global Policy configuration.  Global Policy can be accessed in web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy page. On the top of the configuration  table,  users  can  select  category  in  the  "Options"  dropdown  list  to  quickly  navigate  to  the category. The categories are:
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 93 of 321     Localization: configure display language, data and time.  Phone Settings: configure dial plan, call features, NAT, call progress tones and etc.  Contact List: configure LDAP and XML phonebook download.  Maintenance: configure upgrading, web access, Telnet/SSH access and syslog.  Network Settings: configure IP address, QoS and STUN settings.  Customization: customize LCD screen wallpaper for the supported models.  Select the checkbox on the left of the parameter you would like to configure to active the dropdown list for this parameter.   Figure 66: Global Policy Categories  The following tables list the Global Policy configuration parameters for the SIP end device.  Table 25: Global Policy Parameters->Localization Language settings Language Select the LCD display language on the SIP end device. Date and Time Date Format Configure the date display format on the SIP end device’s LCD. Time Format Configure the time display in 12-hour or 24-hour format on the  SIP end device’s LCD. NTP Server Configure the URL or IP address of the NTP server. The SIP end device may obtain the date and time from the server. Time Zone Configure the time zone used on the SIP end device.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 94 of 321    Table 26: Global Policy Parameters->Phone Settings Default Call Settings Dial Plan Configure  the  default  dial  plan  rule.  For  syntax  and  examples,  please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details. Enable Call Features When enabled, “Do  Not  Disturb”, “Call  Forward”  and other  call features can be used via the local feature code on the phone. Otherwise, the ITSP feature code will be used. Use # as Dial Key If set to “Yes”, pressing the number key “#” will immediately dial out the input digits. Auto Answer by Call-info If set to "Yes", the phone will automatically turn on the speaker phone to answer incoming calls after a short reminding beep, based on the SIP Call-Info header sent from the server/proxy. The default setting is enabled. NAT Traversal Configure which NAT traversal mechanism will be enabled on the endpoint device.   If set to "STUN" and STUN server is configured, the phone system will periodically send STUN message to the SUTN server to get the public IP address of its NAT environment and keep the NAT port open. STUN will not work if the NAT is symmetric type. If set to “Keep-alive”, the phone system will send the STUN packets to maintain the connection that is first established during registration of the phone. The “Keep-alive” packets will fool the NAT device into keeping the connection open and this allows the host server to send SIP requests directly to the registered phone. If it needs to use OpenVPN to connect host server, it needs to set it to “VPN”. If the firewall and the SIP device behind the firewall are both able to use   UPNP, it can be set to “UPNP”. The both parties will negotiate to use which port to allow SIP through. The default setting is "Keep-alive".   Use Random Port Configure whether to allow the endpoint device to use random ports for both SIP and RTP messages. This is usually necessary when multiple phones are behind the same full cone NAT. The default setting is "No". Note: This parameter must be set to "No" for Direct IP Calling to work. General Settings Call Progress Tones Configure call progress tones including ring tone, dial  tone, second  dial tone, message waiting tone, ring back tone, call waiting tone, busy tone and reorder tone using the following syntax: f1=val, f2=val[, c=on1/ off1[- on2/ off2[- on3/ off3]]];
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 95 of 321       Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in 10ms).    “on” is the period (in ms) of ringing while “off” is the period of silence. Up to three cadences are supported.   Please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details HEADSET Key Mode Select “Default Mode” or “Toggle Headset/Speaker” for the Headset key. Please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details.  Table 27: Global Policy Parameters->Contact List LDAP Phonebook Source Select "Manual" or "PBX" as the LDAP configuration source.   If "Manual" is selected, the LDAP configuration below will be applied to the SIP end device.   If "PBX" is selected, the LDAP configuration built-in  from UCM6200 web UI->Settings->LDAP Server will be applied. Address Configure the IP address or DNS name of the LDAP server. Port Configure the LDAP server port. The default value is 389. Base DN This  is  the  location  in  the  directory  where  the  search  is  requested  to begin. Example:   dc=grandstream, dc=com   ou=Boston, dc=grandstream, dc=com User Name Configure the bind "Username" for querying LDAP servers. The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds. Password Configure the bind "Password" for querying LDAP servers. The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds. Number Filter Configure the filter used for number lookups. Please refer to user manual for more details. Name Filter Configure the filter used for name lookups. Please refer to user manual for more details. Version Select the protocol version for the phone to send the bind requests. The default value is 3. Name Attribute Specify  the  "name"  attributes  of  each  record  which  are  returned  in  the LDAP search result. Example:  gn   cn sn description Number Attribute Specify the "number" attributes of each record which are returned in the
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 96 of 321    LDAP search result. Example:   telephoneNumber   telephoneNumber Mobile Display Name Configure  the  entry  information  to  be  shown  on  phone's  LCD.  Up  to  3 fields can be displayed. Example:   %cn %sn %telephoneNumber Max Hits Specify  the  maximum  number  of  results  to  be  returned  by  the  LDAP server. Valid range is 1 to 3000. The default value is 50. Search Timeout Specify the interval (in seconds) for the server to process the request and client waits for server to return. Valid range is 0 to 180. The default value is 30. Sort Results Specify whether the searching result is sorted or not. The default setting is No. Incoming Calls Configure to enable LDAP number searching  when receiving calls.  The default setting is No. Outgoing Calls Configure  to  enable  LDAP  number  searching  when  making  calls.  The default setting is No. Lookup Display Name Configures the display name when LDAP looks up the name for incoming call or outgoing call. It must be a subset of the LDAP Name Attributes. XML Phonebook Phonebook XML Server Select the source of the phonebook XML server.   Disable Disable phonebook XML downloading.   Manual Once  selected,  users  need  specify  downloading  protocol  HTTP, HTTPS  or  TFTP  and  the  server  path  to  download  the  phonebook XML file. The server path could be IP address or URL, with up to 256 characters.   Local UCM Server Once selected, click on the Server Path field to upload the phonebook XML file. Please note: after uploading the phonebook XML file to the server, the original file name will be used as the directory name and the file will be renamed as phonebook.xml under that directory. Phonebook Download Interval Configure  the  phonebook  download  interval  (in  Minute).  If  set  to  0, automatic download will be disabled. Valid range is 5 to 720. Remove manually-edited entries on download If set to "Yes", when XML phonebook is downloaded, the entries added manually will be automatically removed.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 97 of 321    Table 28: Global Policy Parameters->Maintenance Upgrade and Provision Firmware Source Firmware  source  via  ZeroConfig  provisioning  could  a  URL  for  external server  address,  local  UCM  directory  or  USB  media  if  plugged  in  to  the UCM6200.  Select a source to get the firmware file:  URL If  select  to  use  URL  to  upgrade,  complete  the  configuration  for  the following four parameters: “Upgrade Via”, “Server Path”, “File Prefix” and “File Postfix”.   Local UCM Server Firmware  can  be  uploaded  to  the  UCM6200  internal  storage  for firmware upgrade. If selected, click on “Manage Storage” icon next to “Directory”  option,  upload  firmware  file  and  select  directory  for  the end device to retrieve the firmware file.     Local USB Media If  selected,  the  USB  storage  device  needs  to  be  plugged  into  the UCM6200  and  the  firmware  file  must  be  put  under  a  folder  named “ZC_firmware” in the USB storage root directory.   Local SD Card Media If selected, an SD card needs to be plugged into the UCM6200 and the firmware file must be put under a folder named “ZC_firmware” in the USB storage root directory. Upgrade via When URL is selected as firmware source, configure upgrade via TFTP, HTTP or HTTPS. Server Path When  URL  is  selected  as  firmware  source,  configure  the  firmware upgrading server path. File Prefix When  URL  is  selected  as  firmware  source,  configure  the  firmware  file prefix. If configured, only the firmware with the matching encrypted prefix will  be  downloaded  and  flashed  into  the  phone,  if  URL  is  selected  as firmware source. File Postfix When  URL  is  selected  as  firmware  source,  configure  the  firmware  file postfix.  If  configured,  only  the  configuration  file  with  the  matching encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the phone. Allow DHCP Option 43/66 If DHCP option 43 or 66 is enabled on the LAN side, the TFTP server can be redirected. Automatic Upgrade If  enabled,  the  endpoint  device  will  automatically  upgrade  if  a  new firmware  is  detected.  Users  can  select  automatic  upgrading  by  day,  by week or by minute.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 98 of 321      By week Once  selected,  specify  the  day  of  the  week  to  check  HTTP/TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes.   By day Once selected, specify the hour of the day to check the HTTP/TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes.   By minute Once  selected,  specify  the  interval  X  that  the  SIP  end  device  will request for new firmware every X minutes. Firmware Upgrade Rule Specify how firmware upgrading and provisioning request to be sent. Web Access Admin Password Configure the administrator password for admin level login. End-User Password Configure the end-user password for the end user level login. Web Access Mode Select HTTP or HTTPS as the web access protocol. Web Server Port Configure the port for web access. The valid range is 1 to 65535. Security Disable Telnet/SSH   Enable Telnet/SSH access for the SIP end device. If the SIP end device supports  Telnet  access,  this  option  controls  the  Telnet  access  of  the device; if the SIP end device supports SSH access, this option controls the SSH access of the device.   Syslog   Syslog Server Configure the URL/IP address for the syslog server. Syslog Level Select the level of logging for syslog. Send SIP Log Configure whether the SIP log will be included in the syslog message.  Table 29: Global Policy Parameters->Network Settings Basic Settings IP Address Configure how the SIP end device shall obtain the IP address. DHCP or PPPoE can be selected.    DHCP Once selected,  users can  specify the  Host Name (option  12) of  the SIP  end  device  as  DHCP  client,  and  Vendor  Class  ID  (option  60) used  by  the  client  and  server  to  exchange  vendor  class  ID information.   PPPoE Once  selected,  users  need  specify  the  Account  ID,  Password  and Service Name for PPPoE. Advanced Setting
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 99 of 321    Layer 3 QoS Define the Layer 3 QoS parameter. This value is used for IP Precedence, Diff-Serv or MPLS. Valid range is 0-63. Layer 2 QoS Tag Assign the VLAN Tag of the Layer 2 QoS packets. Valid range is 0 -4095. Layer 2 QoS Priority Value Assign the priority value of the Layer 2 QoS packets. Valid range is 0-7. STUN Server Configure  the  IP  address  or  Domain  name  of  the  STUN  server.  Only non-symmetric NAT routers work with STUN. Keep Alive Interval Specify  how  often  the  phone  will  send  a  blank  UDP  packet  to  the  SIP server in order to keep the "ping hole" on the NAT router to open. Valid range is 10-160.  Table 30: Global Policy Parameters->Customization Wallpaper Screen Resolution 1024 x 600 Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 1024 x 600 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper.     Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored.   File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If "Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. Screen Resolution 800 x 400 Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 800 x 400 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper.     Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored.   File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If "Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. Screen Resolution 480 x 272 Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 480 x 272 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper.     Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored.   File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If "Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. Screen Resolution 320 x 240 Check this option if the SIP end device supports 320 x 240 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper.     Source
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 100 of 321    Configure the location where wallpapers are stored.   File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If "Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200.  GLOBAL TEMPLATES  Global  Templates  can  be  accessed  in  web  GUI->PBX->Zero  Config->Global  Templates.  Users  can create  multiple  global  templates  with  different  sets  of  configurations  and  save  the  templates.  Later  on, when the user configures the device in Edit Device dialog->Advanced Settings, the user can select to use one of the global template for the device. Please refer to section [MANAGE DEVICES] for more details on using the global templates.  When creating global template, users can select the categories and the parameters under each category to be used in the template. The global policy and the selected global template will both take effect when generating the config file.  However,  the selected global template has  higher priority to  the global  policy when it comes to the same setting option/field. If the same option/field has different value configured in the global policy and the selected global template, the value for this option/field in the selected global template will override the value in global policy.  Click on "Create New Template" to add a global template. Users will see the following configurations.  Table 31: Create New Template Template Name Create a name to identify this global template. Description   Provide a description for the global template. This is optional. Active Check this option to enable the global template.      Click on    to edit the global template.   The  window for editing  global  template  is  shown  in  the following  figure. In the  “Options”  field,  after entering the option name key word, the options containing the key word will be listed. Users could then select the options to be modified and click on “Add Option” to add it into the global template.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 101 of 321     Figure 67: Edit Global Template  The added options will show in the list. Users can then enter or select value for each option to be used in the global template. On the left side of each  added option, users can click on    to remove this option from the template. On the right side of each option, users can click on    to reset the option value to the default value.  Click on “Save” to save this global template.    The created global templates will show in the web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Templates page. Users can click on    to delete the global template or click on “Delete Selected Templates” to delete multiple selected templates at once.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 102 of 321     Click on “Toggle Selected Template(s)” to toggle the status between enabled/disabled for the selected templates.  MODEL CONFIGURATION MODEL TEMPLATES  Model layer configuration allows users to  apply model-specific configurations to different devices. Users could  create/edit/delete  a  model  template  by  accessing  web  GUI,  page  PBX->Zero  Config->Model Templates. If multiple model templates are created and enabled, when the user configures the device in Edit  Device  dialog->Advanced  Settings,  the  user  can  select  to  use  one  of  the  model  template  for  the device. Please refer to section [MANAGE DEVICES] for more details on using the model template.  For each created model template, users can  assign it as default model template. If assigned as default model template, the values in this model template will be applied to all the devices of this model. There is always only one default model template that can be assigned at one time on the UCM6200.  The  selected  model  template  and  the  default model  template  will  both take  effect  when generating  the config file for the device. However, the model template has higher priority to default model template when it comes to the same setting option/field. If the same option/field has different value configured in the default model  template  and  the  selected  model  template,  the  value  for  this  option/field  in  the  selected  model template will override the value in default model template.    Click on “Create New Template” to add a model template.  Table 32: Create New Model Template Model Select  a  model  to  apply  this  template.  The  supported  Grandstream models are listed in the dropdown list for selection. Template Name Create a name for the model template. Description Enter a description for the model template. This is optional. Default Model Template Select to assign this model template as the default model template. The value of  the  option  in default model template  will be  overridden if  other selected model template has a different value for the same option. Active Check this option to enable the model template.    Click on    to edit the model template.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 103 of 321    The editing window for model template is shown in the following figure. In the “Options” field, enter the option name key word, the option that contains the key word will be listed. User could then select the option and click on “Add Option” to add it into the model template.   Once added, the option will be shown in the list below. On the left side of each option, users can click on   to remove this option from the model template. On the right side of each option, users can click on    to reset the option to the default value.  User could also click on “Add New Field” to add a P value number and the value to the configuration. The following figure shows setting P value “P1362” to “en”, which means the display language on the LCD  is  set  to  English.  For  P  value  information  of  different  models,  please  refer  to  configuration template here http://www.grandstream.com/support/tools.   Figure 68: Edit Model Template
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 104 of 321      Click  on  Save  when  done.  The  model  template  will  be  displayed  on  web  UI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Templates page.   Click on    to delete the model template or click on “Delete Selected Templates” to delete multiple selected templates at once.  Click on “Toggle Selected Template(s)” to toggle the status between enabled/disabled for the selected model templates.  MODEL UPDATE  UCM6200  zero  config  feature  supports  provisioning  all  models  of  Grandstream  SIP  end  devices. Templates for most of the Grandstream models are built in with the UCM6200 already. Templates for GS Wave  and  Grandstream  surveillance  products  require  users  to  download  and  install  under  web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Update first before they are available in the UCM6200 for selection. After downloading  and  installing  the  model  template  to  the  UCM6200,  it  will  show  in  the  dropdown  list  for “Model” selection when editing the model template.   Click on    to download the template.   Click on    to upgrade the model template. Users will see this icon available if the device model has template updated in the UCM6200.   Figure 69: Template Management  In case the UCM6200 is placed in the private network and Internet access is restricted, users will not be able to get packages by downloading and installing from the remote server. Model template package can be manually uploaded from local device through web UI. Please contact Grandstream customer support if the model package is needed for manual uploading.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 105 of 321     Figure 70: Upload Model Template Manually  DEVICE CONFIGURATION  On  web  GUI,  page  PBX->Zero  Config->Zero  Config,  users  could  create  new  device,  delete  existing device(s), make special configuration for a single device, or send NOTIFY to existing device(s).    CREATE NEW DEVICE  Besides configuring the device after the device is discovered, users could also directly create a new device and configure basic settings before the device is discovered by the UCM6200. Once the device is plugged in, it can then be discovered and provisioned. This gives the system administrator adequate time to set up each device beforehand.  Click  on  "Create  New  Device"  and  the  following  dialog  will show. Follow  the steps  below  to  create the configurations for the new device.  1.  Firstly, select a model for the device to be created and enter its MAC address, IP address and firmware version (optional) in the corresponding field. 2.  Basic settings will show a list of settings based on the model selected in step 1. Users could assign extensions to accounts, assign functions to Line Keys and Multiple-Purposed Keys if supported on the selected model. 3.  Click on “Create New Device” to save the configuration for this device.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 106 of 321     Figure 71: Create New Device  MANAGE DEVICES  The device manually created or discovered from Auto Discover will be listed in the web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero  Config  page.  Users  can  see  the  devices  with  their  MAC  address,  IP  address,  vendor, model and etc.   Figure 72: Manage Devices   Click on    to access the web UI of the phone.   Click on    to edit the device configuration.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 107 of 321    A  new  dialog  will  be  displayed  for  the users  to  configure  “Basic”  settings  and  “Advanced”  settings. “Basic” settings have the same configurations as displayed when manually creating a new device, i.e., account, line key and MPK settings;  “Advanced”  settings allow  users to  configure more details  in a five-level structure.  Figure 73: Edit Device  A preview of the “Advanced” settings is shown in the above figure. There are five levels configurations as described in (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) below, with priority from the lowest to the highest. The configurations in  all  levels  will  take  effect  for  the  device.  If  there  are  same  options  existing  in  different  level configurations with different value configured, the higher level configuration will override the lower level configuration.  (1)  Global Policy This  is  the  lowest  level  configuration.  The  global  policy  configured  in  web  UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy will be applied here. Clicking on “Modify Global Policy” to redirect to page PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 108 of 321    (2)  Global Templates Select  a  global  template  to  be  used  for  the  device  and  click  on    to  add.  Multiple  global templates can be selected and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via  and  . All  the selected  global  templates  will  take  effect. If  the same  option  exists on  multiple  selected global templates, the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority. Click on  to remove the global template from the selected list.  (3)  Default Model Template Default Model Template will be applied to the devices of this model. Default model template can be configured  in  model  template  under  web  UI->PBX->Zero  Config->Model  Templates page. Please see default model template option in [Table 32: Create New Model Template].    (4)  Model Templates Select  a  model  template  to  be  used  for  the  device  and  click  on    to  add.  Multiple  global templates can be selected and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via    and  . All the selected  model  templates  will take  effect. If the same  option exists on  multiple  selected model templates, the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority. Click on  to remove the model template from the selected list.  (5)  Customize Device Settings This is the highest level configuration for the device. Click on “Modify Customize Device Settings” and following dialog will show.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 109 of 321     Figure 74: Edit Customize Device Settings  Scroll down in the dialog to view and edit the device-specific options. If the users would like to add more options which are not in the pre-defined list, click on “Add New Field” to add a P value number and the value to the configuration. The following figure shows setting P value “P1362” to “en”, which means the display language on the LCD is set to English. The warning information on right tells that the option matching the P value number exists and clicking on it will lead to the matching  option.  For  P  value  information  of  different  models,  please  refer  to  configuration template here http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/config-template.zip.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 110 of 321     Figure 75: Add P Value in Customize Device Settings    Select multiple devices that need to be modified and then click on    to batch modify devices.  If  selected  devices  are  of  the  same  model,  the  configuration  dialog  is  like  the  following  figure. Configurations in five levels are all available for users to modify.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 111 of 321     Figure 76: Modify Selected Devices - Same Model  If    selected devices are of different models, the configuration dialog is like the following figure. Click on    to view more devices of other models. Users are only allowed to make modifications in Global Templates and Global Policy level.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 112 of 321     Figure 77: Modify Selected Devices - Different Models   --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  Note: Performing batch operation will override all the existing device configuration on the page.   --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    After  the  above  configurations,  save  the  changes  and  go  back  to  web  UI->PBX->Zero  Config->Zero Config page. Users could then click on    to send NOTIFY to the SIP end point device and trigger the provisioning  process.  The  device  will  start  downloading  the  generated  configuration  file  from  the  URL contained in the NOTIFY message.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 113 of 321     Figure 78: Device List in Zero Config  In this web page, users can also click on “Reset All Extensions” to reset the extensions of all the devices.  SAMPLE APPLICATION  Assuming in a small business office where there are 8 GXP2140 phones used by customer support and 1 GXV3275  phone  used  by  customer  support  supervisor.  3  of  the  8  customer  support  members  speak Spanish and the rest speak English. We could deploy the following configurations to provisioning the office phones for the customer support team.  1.  Go to web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config Settings, select “Enable Zero Config”.    2.  Go  to  web  GUI->PBX->Zero  Config->Global  Policy,  configure  Date  Format,  Time  Format  and Firmware Source as follows.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 114 of 321     Figure 79: Zero Config Sample - Global Policy  3.  Go  to  web  GUI->PBX->Zero  Config->Model  Templates,  create  a  new  model  template  “English Support Template” for GXP2140. Add option “Language” and set it to “English”. Then select the option “Default Model Template” to make it the default model template.  4.  Go  to  web  GUI->PBX->Zero  Config->Model  Templates,  create  another  model  template  “Spanish Support Template” for GXP2140. Add option “Language” and set it to “Español”.  5.  After 9 devices are powered up and connected to the LAN network, use “Auto Discover” function or “Create  New  Device”  function  to  add  the  devices  to  the  device  list  on  web  UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config.  6.  On web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config page, users could identify the devices by their MAC addresses or IP addresses displayed on the list. Click on    to edit the device settings.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 115 of 321    7.  For each of the 5 phones used by English  speaking customer support, in “Basic” settings select an available extension for account 1 and click on “Save”. Then click on “Advanced” settings tab to bring up the following dialog. Users will see the English support template is applied since this is the default model template. A preview of the device settings will be listed on the right side.   Figure 80: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 1  8.  For  the  3  phones  used  by  Spanish  support,  in  “Basic”  settings  select  an  available  extension  for account 1 and click on “Save”. Then click on “Advanced” settings tab to bring up the following dialog.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 116 of 321     Figure 81: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 2  Select  “Spanish  Support  Template”  in  ○4 “Model  Template”.  The  preview  of  the  device  settings  is displayed on the right side and we can see the language is set to “Español” since Model Template has the higher  priority for  the  option “Language”,  which overrides the  value  configured  in default model template.  9.  For the GXV3275 used by the customer support supervisor, select an available extension for account 1 on “Basic”  settings and click  on  “Save”. Users  can see the  preview of  the device configuration in “Advanced” settings. There is no model template configured for GXV3275.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 117 of 321     Figure 82: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 3  10. Click on “Apply Changes” to apply saved changes. 11.  On the web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config page, click on    to send NOTIFY to trigger the device to download config file from UCM6200.   Now  all  the  9  phones  in  the  network  will  be  provisioned  with  an  unique  extension  registered  on  the UCM6200.  3  of  the  phones  will  be  provisioned  to  display  Spanish  on  LCD  and  the  other  5  will  be provisioned to display English on LCD. The GXV3275 used by the supervisor will be provisioned to use the default language on LCD display since it’s not specified in the global policy.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 118 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 119 of 321    EXTENSIONS CREATE NEW USER CREATE NEW SIP EXTENSION  To  manually  create  new  SIP  user,  go  to  Web  GUI->PBX->Basic/Call  Routes->Extensions.  Click  on "Create New User"->"Create New SIP Extension" and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information.   Figure 83: Create New Device  SIP extension options are divided into four categories:    Basic Settings   Media   Features   Specific Time
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 120 of 321    Click on the tag to view or edit options belonging to that category. The configuration parameters are as follows.  Table 33: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings General Extension The extension number associated with the user. CallerID Number Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls from this user. Note: The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider. Permission Assign  permission  level  to  the  user.  The  available  permissions  are "Internal", "Local", "National" and  "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note: Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule.   SIP/IAX Password Configure the password for the user. A random secure password will be automatically  generated.  It  is  recommended  to  use  this  password  for security purpose. Auth ID Configure  the  authentication  ID  for  the  user.  If  not  configured,  the extension number will be used for authentication. Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Voicemail Password Configure  voicemail  password  (digits  only)  for  the  user  to  access  the voicemail box. A random numeric password is automatically generated. It is  recommended  to  use  the  random  generated  password  for  security purpose. Skip Voicemail Password Verification When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. Disable This Extension If selected, this extension will be disabled on the UCM6200.  Note: The disabled extension still exists on the  PBX but can’t be used on the end device. User Settings First Name Configure  the  first  name  of  the  user.  The  first  name  can  contain characters, letters, digits and _. Last Name Configure  the  last  name  of  the  user.  The  last  name  can  contain
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 121 of 321    characters, letters, digits and _. Email Address Fill in the Email address for the user. Voicemail will be sent to this Email address. User Password Configure  the  password  for  user  portal  access.  A  random  numeric password  is  automatically  generated.  It  is  recommended  to  use  the randomly generated password for security purpose. Language Select  the  voice  prompt  language  to  be  used  for  this  extension.  The default setting is "Default"  which is the selected  voice prompt  language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To  add  more  languages  in  the  list,  please  download  voice  prompt package by selecting "Check Prompt List" under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. Concurrent Registrations The maximum endpoints which can be registered into this extension. For security concerns, the default value is 1.    Table 34: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Media SIP Settings NAT Use  NAT  when  the  UCM6200  is  on  a  public  IP  communicating  with devices hidden behind NAT (e.g., broadband router). If there is one-way audio issue, usually it's related to NAT configuration or Firewall's support of SIP and RTP ports. The default setting is enabled. Can Direct Media By default, the UCM6200 will route the media steams from SIP endpoints through  itself.  If  enabled,  the  PBX  will  attempt  to  negotiate  with  the endpoints to route the media stream directly. It is not always possible for the  UCM6200  to  negotiate  endpoint-to-endpoint  media  routing.  The default setting is "No". DTMF Mode Select  DTMF  mode  for  the  user  to  send  DTMF.  The  default  setting  is "RFC2833".  If  "Info"  is  selected,  SIP  INFO  message  will  be  used.  If "Inband" is selected, 64-kbit PCMU and PCMA are required. When "Auto" is selected,  RFC2833  will be  used if  offered, otherwise  "Inband"  will be used. TEL URI If the phone has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to “User=Phone”. “User=Phone” parameter will be attached to the Request-Line  and “TO”  header  in  the SIP request  to  indicate the  E.164 number. If set  to “Enable”, “Tel” will be used instead of “SIP” in the SIP request.   Enable Keep-alive If enabled, empty SDP packet will be sent to the SIP server periodically to keep the NAT port open. The default setting is "Yes".
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 122 of 321    Keep-alive Frequency Configure the Keep-alive interval (in seconds) to check if the host is up. The default setting is 60 seconds. Enable T.38 UDPTL Enable or disable T.38 UDPTL support. SRTP Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is disabled. Fax Mode Select Fax mode. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Strategy This  option  controls  how  the  extension  can  be  used  on  devices  within different types of network.   Allow All Device in any network can register this extension.   Local Subnet Only Only  the  user  in  specific  subnet  can  register  this  extension.  Up  to three subnet addresses can be specified.  A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". Codec Preference Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G,726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8.  Table 35: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Features Call Transfer Call Forward Unconditional Configure  the  Call  Forward  Unconditional  target  number.  If  not configured,  the  Call  Forward  Unconditional  feature  is  deactivated.  The default setting is deactivated. CFU Time Condition Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  Unconditional.  CFU  takes  effect only during the selected time condition. The available time condition are “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of  Holiday”,  “Out  of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 123 of 321    time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward No Answer Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. If not configured, the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. CFN Time Condition Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  No  Answer.  The  available  time condition  are  “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward Busy Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. If not configured, the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. CFB Time Condition Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time condition are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. CC Settings Enable CC If enabled, UCM6200 will automatically alert this extension when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. By default it’s disabled. CC Mode Two modes for Call Completion are supported:  Normal: This extension is used as ordinary extension.  For Trunk: This extension is registered from a PBX. The default setting is “Normal”. CC Max Agents Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 124 of 321    for  this  channel.  In  other  words,  this  number  serves  as  the  maximum number  of  CC requests  this  channel  is allowed  to make.  The  minimum value is 1. CC Max Monitors Configure  the  maximum  number  of  monitor  structures  which  may  be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1. Ring Simultaneously Ring Simultaneously Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension.  If a register  trunk  is used  for  outbound,  the  register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number. External Number Set the external number to  be rang simultaneously. ‘-’ is the connection character which will be ignored. Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the basis of this time condition. Other Settings Ring Timeout Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  the  user  before  the  call  is forwarded  to  voicemail  (voicemail  is  enabled)  or  hang  up  (voicemail  is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200,  which  can  be  configured  in  the  global  ring  timeout  setting under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Auto Record Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  under  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Trunk Auth  If  set  to  “yes”,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when  making outbound calls.    If  set  to  “By  Time”,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when making outbound calls during the selected time condition.    If set to “No”, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls. Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth If ‘Skip Trunk Auth’ is set to ‘By Time’, select a time condition during which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls. Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk. Support Hot-Desking Mode If enabled, SIP Password will accept only alphabet characters and digits.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 125 of 321    Auth ID will be changed to the same as Extension. Enable LDAP If enabled, the extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list. Enable WebRTC Support Enable registration and call from WebRTC.   Music On Hold Specify  which  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  the  bridged  channel when putting them on hold.   Call Duration Limit The maximum duration of call-blocking.    Table 36: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time Specific Time Time Condition Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension.  CREATE NEW IAX EXTENSION  The  UCM6200  supports  Inter-Asterisk  eXchange  (IAX)  protocol.  IAX  is  used  for  transporting  VoIP telephony  sessions  between  servers  and  terminal  devices.  IAX  is  similar  to  SIP  but  also  has  its  own characteristic. For more information, please refer to RFC 5465.     To  manually  create  new  IAX  user,  go  to  Web  GUI->PBX->Basic/Call  Routes->Extensions.  Click  on "Create New User"->"Create New IAX Extension" and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information. The configuration parameters are as follows.  Table 37: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings General Extension The extension number associated with the user. CallerID Number Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls from this user. Note: The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider. Permission Assign  permission  level  to  the  user.  The  available  permissions  are "Internal", "Local", "National" and  "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note: Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule.   SIP/IAX Password Configure the password for the user. A random secure password will be automatically  generated.  It  is  recommended  to  use  this  password  for security purpose.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 126 of 321    Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Voicemail Password Configure  voicemail  password  (digits  only)  for  the  user  to  access  the voicemail box. A random numeric password is automatically generated. It is  recommended  to  use  the  random  generated  password  for  security purpose. Skip Voicemail Password Verification When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. Disable This Extension If selected, this extension will be disabled on the UCM6200.  Note: The disabled extension still exists on the  PBX but can’t be used on the end device. User Settings First Name Configure  the  first  name  of  the  user.  The  first  name  can  contain characters, letters, digits and _. Last Name Configure  the  last  name  of  the  user.  The  last  name  can  contain characters, letters, digits and _. Email Address Fill in the Email address for the user. Voicemail will be sent to this Email address. User Password Configure  the  password  for  user  portal  access.  A  random  numeric password  is  automatically  generated.  It  is  recommended  to  use  the randomly generated password for security purpose. Language Select  the  voice  prompt  language  to  be  used  for  this  extension.  The default setting is "Default"  which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To  add  more  languages  in  the  list,  please  download  voice  prompt package by selecting "Check Prompt List" under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language.  Table 38: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Media SIP Settings Max Number of Calls Configure  the  maximum  number  of  calls  allowed  for  each  remote  IP address. Require Call Token Configure to enable/disable requiring call token. If set to "Auto", it might lock  out  users  who  depend  on  backward  compatibility  when  peer authentication  credentials  are  shared  between  physical  endpoints.  The default setting is "Yes".
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 127 of 321    SRTP Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is disabled. Fax Mode Select Fax Mode. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax. This is the default setting.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Strategy This  option  controls  how  the  extension  can  be  used  on  devices  within different types of network.    Allow All Device in any network can register this extension.   Local Subnet Only Only  the  user  in  specific  subnet  can  register  this extension.  Up  to three subnet addresses can be specified.  A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension.  The default setting is "Allow All". Codec Preference Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G,726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8.  Table 39: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Features Call Transfer Call Forward Unconditional Configure  the  Call  Forward  Unconditional  target  number.  If  not configured,  the  Call  Forward  Unconditional  feature  is  deactivated.  The default setting is deactivated. CFU Time Condition Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  Unconditional.  CFU  takes  effect only during the selected time condition. The available time condition are “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of  Holiday”,  “Out  of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 128 of 321    Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward No Answer Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. If not configured, the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. CFN Time Condition Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  No  Answer.  The  available  time condition  are  “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward Busy Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. If not configured, the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. CFB Time Condition Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time condition are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Ring Simultaneously Ring Simultaneously Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension.  If a  register  trunk  is used for  outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number. External Number Set the external number to be rang simultaneously. ‘-’ is the connection character which will be ignored. Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the basis of this time condition. Other Settings Ring Timeout Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  the  user  before  the  call  is
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 129 of 321    forwarded  to  voicemail  (voicemail  is  enabled)  or  hang  up  (voicemail  is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200,  which  can  be  configured  in  the  global  ring  timeout  setting under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Auto Record Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  under  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Trunk Auth   If  set  to  “Yes”,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when  making outbound calls.     If  set  to  “By  Time”,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when making outbound calls during the selected time condition.     If set to “No”, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls. Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth If  “Skip  Trunk  Auth”  is  set  to  “By  Time”,  select  a  time  condition  during which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls. Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk. Enable LDAP If enabled, the extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX lists. Music On Hold Configure  the  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  the  bridged  channel when putting them on hold. Call Duration Limit The maximum duration of call-blocking.  Table 40: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time Specific Time Time Condition Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension.   CREATE NEW FXS EXTENSION  The UCM6200 supports Foreign eXchange Subscriber (FXS) interface. FXS is used when user needs to connect analog phone lines or FAX machines to the UCM6200.    To  manually  create  new  FXS  user,  go  to  Web  GUI->PBX->Basic/Call  Routes->Extensions.  Click  on "Create New User"->"Create New FXS Extension" and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information. The configuration parameters are as follows.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 130 of 321    Table 41: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings General Extension The extension number associated with the user. Analog Station Select the FXS port to be assigned for this extension. CallerID Number Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls from this user. Note: The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider. Permission Assign  permission  level  to  the  user.  The  available  permissions  are "Internal", "Local", "National" and  "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note: Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule.   Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Voicemail Password Configure  voicemail  password  (digits  only)  for  the  user  to  access  the voicemail box. A random numeric password is automatically generated. It is  recommended  to  use  the  random  generated  password  for  security purpose. Skip Voicemail Password Verification When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. Disable This Extension If selected, this extension will be disabled on the UCM6200.  Note: The disabled extension still exists on the  PBX but can’t be used on the end device. User Settings First Name Configure  the  first  name  of  the  user.  The  first  name  can  contain characters, letters, digits and _. Last Name Configure  the  last  name  of  the  user.  The  last  name  can  contain characters, letters, digits and _. Email Address Fill in the Email address for the user. Voicemail will be sent to this Email address. User Password Configure  the  password  for  user  portal  access.  A  random  numeric password  is  automatically  generated.  It  is  recommended  to  use  the randomly generated password for security purpose.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 131 of 321    Language Select  the  voice  prompt  language  to  be  used  for  this  extension.  The default setting is "Default"  which is the selected  voice prompt  language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To  add  more  languages  in  the  list,  please  download  voice  prompt package by selecting "Check Prompt List" under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language.  Table 42: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Media Analog Settings Call Waiting Configure  to  enable/disable  call  waiting  feature.  The  default  setting  is "No". User ‘#’ as SEND If  configured,  the  #  key  can  be  used  as  SNED  key  after  dialing  the number on the analog phone. The default setting is "Yes". RX Gain Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of analog FXS port. The valid range is -30dB to +6dB. The default setting is 0. TX Gain Configure  the  TX  gain for  the  transmitting channel  of  analog  FXS  port. The valid range is -30dB to +6dB. The default setting is 0. MIN RX Flash Configure the minimum period of time (in milliseconds) that the hook-flash must remain unpressed for the PBX to consider the event as a valid flash event. The valid range is 30ms to 1000ms. The default setting is 200ms. MAX RX Flash Configure  the  maximum  period  of  time  (in  milliseconds)  that  the hook-flash must remain unpressed for the PBX to consider the event as a valid flash event. The minimum  period of  time  is 256ms  and it can't  be modified. The default setting is 1250ms. Enable Polarity Reversal If  enabled,  a  polarity  reversal  will  be  marked  as  received  when  an outgoing  call  is  answered  by  the  remote  party.  For  some  countries,  a polarity reversal is used  for  signaling  the  disconnection  of a  phone line and  the  call  will  be  considered  as  hangup  on  a  polarity  reversal.  The default setting is "Yes". Echo Cancellation Specify "ON", "OFF" or a value (the power of 2) from 32 to 1024 as the number of taps of cancellation. Note: When configuring the number of  taps, the number 256  is not  translated into 256ms of echo cancellation. Instead, 256 taps means 256/8 = 32 ms. The default setting is "ON", which is 128 taps. 3-Way Calling Configure to enable/disable 3-way calling feature on the user. The default setting is enabled. Send CallerID After Configure the number of rings before sending CID. Default setting is 1.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 132 of 321    Fax Mode For FXS  extension, there  are three  options available in  Fax Mode.  The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38.   Fax  Gateway:  If  selected,  the  UCM6200  can  support  conversation and  processing  of  Fax  data  from T.30  to  T.38  or  T.38  to  T.30. This feature is only available for FXS or FXO port.  Table 43: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Features Call Transfer Call Forward Unconditional Configure  the  Call  Forward  Unconditional  target  number.  If  not configured,  the  Call  Forward  Unconditional  feature  is  deactivated.  The default setting is deactivated. CFU Time Condition Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  Unconditional.  CFU  takes  effect only during the selected time condition. The available time condition are “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of  Holiday”,  “Out  of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward No Answer Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. If not configured, the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. CFN Time Condition Select  time  condition  for  Call  Forward  No  Answer.  The  available  time condition  are  “Office  Time”,  “Out  of  Office  Time”,  “Holiday”,  “Out  of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 133 of 321    time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward Busy Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. If not configured, the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. CFB Time Condition Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time condition are “Office Time”, “Out of Office Time”, “Holiday”, “Out of Holiday”, “Out of Office Time or Holiday” and “Specific”.   Note:  “Specific” has higher priority to “Office Times” if there is a conflict in terms of time period.   Specific  time  can  be  configured  on  the  bottom  of  the  extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time.   Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. CC Settings Enable CC If enabled, UCM6200 will automatically alert this extension when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. Ring Simultaneously Ring Simultaneously Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension. If a register trunk is used for outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number. External Number Set the external number to be rang simultaneously. ‘-’ is the connection character which will be ignored. Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the basis of this time condition. Hotline Enable Hotline If enabled, hotline dialing plan will be activated, a pre-configured number will be used according to the selected Hotline Type.   Hotline Number Configure the Hotline Number Hotline Type Configure the Hotline Type:  Immediate  Hotline:  When  the  phone  is  off-hook,  UCM6200  will immediately dial the preset number  Delay  Hotline:  When  the  phone  is  off-hook,  if  there  is  no  dialing within 5 seconds, UCM6200 will dial the preset number. Other Settings
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 134 of 321    Ring Timeout Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  the  user  before  the  call  is forwarded  to  voicemail  (voicemail  is  enabled)  or  hang  up  (voicemail  is disabled). If not specified, the  default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200,  which  can  be  configured  in  the  global  ring  timeout  setting under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Auto Record Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  under  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Trunk Auth   If  set  to  “Yes”,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when  making outbound calls.     If  set  to  “By  Time”,  users  can  skip  entering  the  password  when making outbound calls during the selected time condition.     If set to “No”, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls. Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth If  “Skip  Trunk  Auth”  is  set  to  “By  Time”,  select  a  time  condition  during which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls. Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk. Enable LDAP If enabled, this extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list; if disabled, this extension will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook. Music On Hold Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extension when putting the active call on hold. Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking.    Table 44: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time Specific Time Time Condition Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension.  BATCH ADD EXTENSIONS BATCH ADD SIP EXTENSIONS  In order to add multiple SIP extensions, BATCH add can be used to create standardized SIP extension accounts. However, unique extension user name can’t be set using BATCH add. Under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions, click on "Batch Add Extensions"->"Batch Add SIP Extensions".
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 135 of 321    Table 45: Batch Add SIP Extension Parameters General Start Extension Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added. Create Number Specify the number of extensions to be added. The default setting is 5. Permission Assign  permission  level  to  the  user.  The  available  permissions  are "Internal", "Local", "National" and  "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note: Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls from this rule. Enable Voicemail Enable Voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". SIP/IAX Password Configure  the  SIP/IAX  password  for  the  users.  Three  options  are available to create password for the batch of extensions.   User Random Password. A  random  secure  password  will  be  automatically  generated.  It  is recommended to use this password for security purpose.   Use Extension as Password.   Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Voicemail Password Configure Voicemail password (digits only) for the users.   User Random Password.   A  random  password  in  digits  will  be  automatically  generated.  It  is recommended to use this password for security purpose.   Use Extension as Password.   Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Ring Timeout Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  the  user  before  the  call  is forwarded  to  voicemail  (voicemail  is  enabled)  or  hang  up  (voicemail  is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200,  which  can  be  configured  in  the  global  ring  timeout  setting under  web  GUI->Internal  Options->IVR  Prompt:  General  Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Auto Record Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  under  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Voicemail Password Verification When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 136 of 321    option is disabled. Music On Hold Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extensions when putting them on hold. Enable LDAP If enabled, the batch added extensions will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX  list;  if  disabled,  the  batch  added  extensions  will  be  skipped  when creating LDAP Phonebook. Enable WebRTC Support If  enabled,  extensions  will  be  able  to  login to  user  portal and  use  Web RTC features. Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. SIP Settings NAT Use  NAT  when  the  PBX  is  on  a  public  IP  communicating  with  devices hidden  behind  NAT  (e.g.,  broadband  router).  If  there  is  one-way  audio issue, usually it's related to NAT configuration or Firewall's support of SIP and RTP ports. The default setting is enabled. Can Direct Media By  default,  the  PBX  will  route  the  media  steams  from  SIP  endpoints through  itself.  If  enabled,  the  PBX  will  attempt  to  negotiate  with  the endpoints to route the media stream directly. It is not always possible for the  PBX  to  negotiate  endpoint-to-endpoint  media  routing.  The  default setting is "No". DTMF Mode Select  DTMF  mode  for  the  user  to  send  DTMF.  The  default  setting  is "RFC2833".  If  "Info"  is  selected,  SIP  INFO  message  will  be  used.  If "Inband" is selected, 64-kbit codec PCMU and PCMA are required. When "Auto"  is  selected,  RFC2833  will be  used  if  offered,  otherwise  "Inband" will be used. Enable Keep-alive If enabled, empty SDP packet will be sent to the SIP server periodically to keep the NAT port open. The default setting is "Yes". Keep-alive Frequency Configure the number of seconds for the host to be up for Keep-alive. The default setting is 60 seconds. TEL URI If the  end device/phone has an  assigned  PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be  attached  to  the  Request-Line  and  TO  header  in  the  SIP  request  to indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Concurrent Registrations The maximum endpoints which can be registered into this extension. For security concerns, the default value is 1. Other Settings SRTP Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is "No". Fax Mode Select Fax mode for this user. The default setting is “None”.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 137 of 321      None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Strategy This  option  controls  how  the  extension  can  be  used  on  devices  within different types of network.   Allow All Device in any network can register this extension.   Local Subnet Only Only  the  user  in  specific  subnet  can  register  this  extension.  Up  to three subnet addresses can be specified.  A Specific IP Address.   Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". Enable T.38 UDPTL Enable or disable T.38 UDPTL Support. Skip Trunk Auth If  enable  “All”,  users  do  not  need  to  enter  password  when  making  an outbound call. If enable “Follow Me”, the user can dial out via follow me without password. Codec Preference Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.722, G.729, G.723, Ilbc, ADPCM, LPC10, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8.  BATCH ADD IAX EXTENSIONS  Under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions, click on “Batch Add Extensions”->”Batch Add IAX Extensions”.  Table 46: Batch Add IAX Extension Parameters General Start Extension Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added. Create Number Specify the number of extensions to be added. The default setting is 5. Permission Assign  permission  level  to  the  user.  The  available  permissions  are “Internal”, “Local”, “National” and “International” from the  lowest level  to the highest level. The default setting is “Internal”. Note:
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 138 of 321    Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule’s privilege in order to make outbound calls from this rule. Enable Voicemail Enable Voicemail for the user. The default setting is “Yes”. SIP/IAX Password Configure  the  SIP/IAX  password  for  the  users.  Three  options  are available to create password for the batch of extensions.   User Random Password. A  random  secure  password  will  be  automatically  generated.  It  is recommended to use this password for security purpose.   Use Extension as Password.   Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Voicemail Password Configure Voicemail password (digits only) for the users.   User Random Password.   A  random  password  in  digits  will  be  automatically  generated.  It  is recommended to use this password for security purpose.   Use Extension as Password.   Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Ring Timeout Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  the  user  before  the  call  is forwarded  to  voicemail  (voicemail  is  enabled)  or  hang  up  (voicemail  is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is  60 seconds on the UCM6200,  which  can  be  configured  in  the  global  ring  timeout  setting under  web  GUI->Internal  Options->IVR  Prompt:  General  Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note: If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Auto Record Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  under  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Voicemail Password Verification When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. Music On Hold Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extensions when putting them on hold. Enable LDAP If enabled, the batch added extensions will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX  list;  if  disabled,  the  batch  added  extensions  will  be  skipped  when creating LDAP Phonebook. Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. IAX Settings Max Number of Calls Configure  the  maximum  number  of  calls  allowed  for  each  remote  IP
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 139 of 321    address. Require Call Token Configure to enable/disable requiring call token. If set to "Auto", it might lock  out  users  who  depend  on  backward  compatibility  when  peer authentication  credentials  are  shared  between  physical  endpoints.  The default setting is "Yes". Other Settings SRTP Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is "No". Fax Mode Select Fax Mode for this user. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Strategy This  option  controls  how  the  extension  can  be  used  on  devices  within different types of network.   Allow All Device in any network can register this extension.   Local Subnet Only Only  the  user  in  specific  subnet  can  register  this  extension.  Up  to three subnet addresses can be specified.  A Specific IP Address.   Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". Skip Trunk Auth If  enable  “All”,  users  do  not  need  to  enter  password  when  making  an outbound call. If  enable “Follow Me”, the call  can dial out  via follow me without password. Codec Preference Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are: PCMU,  PCMA,  GSM,  AAL2-G.726-32,  G.722,  G.729,  G.723,  iLBC, ADPCM, LPC10, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8.  SEARCH AND EDIT EXTENSION  All  the  UCM6200  extensions  are  listed  under  Web  GUI->PBX->Basic/Call  Routes->Extensions,  with status, Extension,  CallerID  Name,  Technology (SIP,  IAX  and  FXS),  IP and  Port.  Each  extension  has  a checkbox  for  users  to  "Modify  Selected  Extensions"  or  "Delete  Selected  Extensions".  Also,  options "Edit”, "Reboot"    and "Delete"    are available per extension. User can search an extension by specifying the extension number to find an extension quickly.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 140 of 321     Figure 84: Manage Extensions   Status Users can see the following icon for each extension to indicate the SIP status.     Green:      Free     Blue:      Ringing     Yellow:      In Use     Grey:      Unavailable (the extension is not registered or disabled on the PBX)   Edit single extension Click on  to start editing the extension parameters.   Reboot the user Click on    to send NOTIFY reboot event to the device which has an UCM6200 extension already registered. To successfully reboot the user, "Zero Config" needs to be enabled on the UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Auto Provisioning Settings.   Delete single extension Click on    to delete the extension. Or select the checkbox of the extension and then click on "Delete Selected Extensions".   Modify selected extensions Select  the  checkbox  for  the  extension(s).  Then  click  on  "Modify  Selected  Extensions"  to  edit  the extensions in a batch.   Delete selected extensions Select  the checkbox  for  the  extension(s).  Then  click  on "Delete  Selected  Extensions"  to  delete  the extension(s).
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 141 of 321    EXPORT EXTENSIONS  The extensions configured on the UCM6200 can be exported to csv format file with selected technology "SIP", "IAX" or "FXS". Click on "Export Extensions" button and select technology in the prompt below.  Figure 85: Export Extensions  The exported csv file can be serve as a template for users to fill in desired extension information to be imported to the UCM6200.  IMPORT EXTENSIONS  The capability to import extensions to the UCM6200 provides users flexibility to batch add extensions with similar or different configuration quickly into the PBX system.  1.  Export extension csv file from the UCM6200 by clicking on "Export Extensions" button. 2.  Fill up the extension information you would like in the exported csv template. 3.  Click on "Import Extensions" button. The following dialog will be prompted.  Figure 86: Import Extensions  4.  Select the option in "On Duplicate Extension" to define how the duplicate extension(s) in the imported csv file should be treated by the PBX.    Skip: Duplicate extensions in the csv file will be skipped. The PBX will keep the current extension
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 142 of 321    information as previously configured without change.   Delete  and  Recreate:  The  current  extension  previously  configured  will  be  deleted  and  the duplicate extension in the csv file will be loaded to the PBX.   Update Information: The current extension previously configured in the PBX will be kept. However, if the duplicate extension in the csv file has different configuration for any options, it will override the configuration for those options in the extension. 5.  Click on  to select csv file from local directory in the PC. 6.  Click on "Save" to import the csv file. 7.  Click on "Apply Changes" to apply the imported file on the UCM6200.  EMAIL TO USER  Once the extensions are created with Email address, the PBX administrator can click on button “Email To User” to send the account registration and configuration information to the user. Please make sure Email setting  under  web  UI->Settings->Email  Settings  is  properly  configured  and  tested  on  the  UCM6200 before using “Email To User”.  When click on “Email To User” button, the following message will be prompted in the web page. Click on OK to confirm sending the account information to all users’ Email addresses.   Figure 87: Email To User - Prompt Information  The user will receive Email including account registration information and LDAP configuration. A QR code is  also  generated  for  Mobile  applications  to  scan  it  and  get  automatically  provisioned.  QR  code provisioning is supported on Grandstream Softphone GS Wave AndroidTM application and iOS application.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 143 of 321      Figure 88: Account Registration Information and QR Code     Figure 89: LDAP Client Information and QR Code
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 144 of 321    MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS PER EXTENSION  UCM6200  supports  multiple  registrations  per  extension  so  that  users  can  use  the  same  extension  on devices in different locations.     Figure 90: Multiple Registrations per Extension  This  feature  can  be  enabled  by  configuring  option  “Concurrent  Registrations”  under  web UI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Edit Extension. The default value is set to 1 for security purpose.     Figure 91: Extension - Concurrent Registration
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 145 of 321    SMS MESSAGE SUPPORT  The UCM6200 provides built-in SIP SMS message support. For SIP end devices such as Grandstream GXP or GXV phones that supports SIP message, after an UCM6200 account is registered on the end device, the user can send and receive SMS message. Please refer to the end device documentation on how to send and receive SMS message. SMS Message support is a new feature added since firmware 1.0.10.x.  Figure 92: SMS Message Support
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 146 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 147 of 321    TRUNKS ANALOG TRUNKS  Go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks to add and edit analog trunks.    Click on "Create New Analog Trunk" to add a new analog trunk.   Click on    to edit the analog trunk.   Click on    to delete the analog trunk.  ANALOG TRUNK CONFIGURATION  The analog trunk options are listed in the table below.  Table 47: Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters Channels Select the channel for the analog trunk.  UCM6202: 2 channels  UCM6204: 4 channels  UCM6208: 8 channels Trunk Name Specify a unique label to identify the trunk when listed in outbound rules, incoming rules and etc. SLA Mode Enable  this  option  to  satisfy  two  primary  use  cases,  which  include emulating a simple key system and creating shared extensions on a PBX. Enable SLA Mode will disable polarity reversal. Barge Allowed The barge option specifies  whether or  not other stations are  allowed to join  a  call  in  progress  on  this  trunk.  If  enabled,  the  other  stations  can press the line button to join the call. The default setting is Yes. Hold Access The hold option specifies hold permissions for this trunk. If set to “Open”, any station can place this trunk on hold and any other station is allowed to retrieve the call. If set to “Private”, only the station that places the call on hold can retrieve the call. The default setting is Yes.   Advanced Options Enable Polarity Reversal If  enabled,  a  polarity  reversal  will  be  marked  as  received  when  an outgoing  call  is  answered  by  the  remote  party.  For  some  countries,  a polarity reversal is used  for  signaling  the disconnection  of  a phone  line and  the  call  will  be  considered  as  “hangup”  on  a  polarity  reversal.  The
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 148 of 321    default setting is “No”. Polarity on Answer Delay When FXO port answers the call, FXS may send  a Polarity Reversal. If this interval is  shorter than the value of  “Polarity on Answer Delay”, the Polarity  Reversal  will  be  ignored.  Otherwise,  the  FXO  will  onhook  to disconnect the call. The default setting is 600ms. Current Disconnect Threshold (ms) This is the periodic time (in ms) that the UCM6200 will use to check on a voltage drop in the line. The default setting is 200. The valid range is 50 to 3000. Ring Timeout Configure  the  ring  timeout  (in  ms).  Trunk  (FXO)  devices  must  have  a timeout to determine if there was a hangup before the line is answered. This  value  can  be  used  to  configure  how  long  it  takes  before  the UCM6200 considers a non-ringing line  with hangup activity. The  default setting is 8000. RX Gain Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of analog FXO port. The valid range is from -13.5 (dB) to + 12.0 (dB). The default setting is 0. TX Gain Configure  the TX  gain  for the  transmitting channel  of analog FXO  port. The valid range is from -13.5 (dB) to + 12.0 (dB). The default setting is 0. Use CallerID Configure to enable CallerID detection. The default setting is “Yes”. Caller ID Scheme Select  the  Caller  ID  scheme  for  this  trunk.  The  default  setting  is “Bellcore/Telcordia”. FXO Dial Delay(ms) Configure  the  time  interval  between  off-hook  and  first  dialed  digit  for outbound calls. Auto Record Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  trunk.  The  default setting  is  disabled.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  under  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. DAHDI Out Line Selection This is to implement analog trunk outbound line selection strategy. Three options are available:   Ascend When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will always try to use the first idle FXO port. The port order that the call will use to go out would be port 1->port 2->port 10->port 16. Every time it will start with port 1 (if it's idle).   Poll When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will use the port that is not used last time. And it will always use the port in the order of port 1->2->10->16->1->2->10->16->1->2->10->16...,  following  the  last port being used.   Descend
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 149 of 321    When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will always try to use the last idle FXO port. The port order that the call will use to go out would be port 16->port 10->port 2->port 1. Every time it will start with port 16 (if it's idle).  The default setting is “Ascend” mode. Tone Settings Busy Detection Busy  Detection  is  used  to  detect  far  end  hangup  or  for  detecting  busy signal. The default setting is "Yes". Busy Tone Count If  "Busy  Detection"  is  enabled,  users  can  specify  the  number  of  busy tones  to  be  played  before  hanging  up.  The  default  setting  is  2.  Better results might be  achieved  if set to  4, 6  or even 8.  Please  note that the higher  the  number  is,  the  more  time  is  needed  to  hangup  the channel. However, this might lower the probability to get random hangup. Congestion Detection Congestion  detection  is  used  to  detect  far  end  congestion  signal.  The default setting is "Yes". Congestion Count If  "Congestion  Detection"  is  enabled,  users  can  specify  the  number  of congestion tones to wait for. The default setting is 2. Tone Country Select the country for tone settings. If "Custom" is selected, users could manually configure the values for Busy Tone and Congestion Tone. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". Busy Tone Syntax:   f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-on2/off2[-on3/off3]]; Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms. Frequencies Range: [0, 4000) Busy Level Range: (-300, 0) Cadence Range: [0, 16383]. Select Tone Country "Custom" to manually configure Busy Tone value. Default value: f1=480@-50,f2=620@-50,c=500/500 Congestion Tone Syntax:   f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-on2/off2[-on3/off3]]; Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms. Frequencies Range: [0, 4000) Busy Level Range: (-300, 0) Cadence Range: [0, 16383]. Select Tone Country "Custom" to manually configure Busy Tone value. Default value: f1=480@-50,f2=620@-50,c=250/250
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 150 of 321    PSTN Detection Click on "Detect" to detect the busy tone, Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by PSTN. Before the detecting, please make sure there are more than one channel configured and working properly. If the detection has busy tone, the "Tone Country" option will be set as "Custom".  PSTN DETECTION  The UCM6200 provides PSTN detection function to help users detect the busy tone, Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by making a call from the PSTN line to another destination. The detecting call will be answered and up for about 1 minute. Once done, the detecting result will show and can be used for the UCM6200 settings.  1.  Go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks page. 2.  Click to edit the analog trunk created for the FXO port.   3.  In the dialog window to edit the analog trunk, go to "Tone Settings" section and there are two methods to set the busy tone.    Tone Country. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)".   PSTN Detection.   Figure 93: UCM6200 FXO Tone Settings  4.  Click on "Detect" to start PSTN detection.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 151 of 321     Figure 94: UCM6200 PSTN Detection    If there are two FXO ports connected to PSTN lines, use the following settings for auto-detection.  Detect Model: Auto Detect. Source Channel: The source channel to be detected. Destination Channel: The channel to help detecting. For example, the second FXO port. Destination  Number:  The  number  to  be  dialed  for  detecting.  This  number  must  be  the  actual PSTN number for the FXO port used as the destination channel.   Figure 95: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Auto Detect
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 152 of 321       If there is only one FXO port connected to PSTN line, use the following settings for auto-detection.  Figure 96: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Semi-Auto Detect  Detect Model: Semi-auto Detect. Source Channel: The source channel to be detected. Destination Number: The number to be dialed for detecting. This number could be a cell phone number or other PSTN number that can be reached from the source channel PSTN number.  5.  Click "Detect" to start detecting. The source channel will initiate a call to the destination number. For "Auto Detect", the call will be automatically answered. For "Semi-auto Detect", the UCM6200 web GUI will display prompt to notify the user to answer or hang up the call to finish the detecting process.  6.  Once  done,  the  detected  result  will  show.  Users  could  save  the  detecting  result  as  the  current UCM6200 settings.  Table 48: PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk Detect Model Select "Auto Detect" or "Semi-auto Detect" for PSTN detection.   Auto Detect Please  make  sure  two  or  more  channels  are  connected  to  the UCM6200 and in idle status before starting the detection. During the detection, one channel will be used as caller (Source Channel) and another  channel  will  be  used  as  callee  (Destination  Channel).  The UCM6200 will control the call to be established and hang up between caller and callee to finish the detection.   Semi-auto Detect Semi-auto  detection  requires  answering  or  hanging  up  the  call
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 153 of 321    manually.  Please  make  sure  one  channel  is  connected  to  the UCM6200 and in idle status before starting the detection. During the detection, source channel will be used as caller and send the call to the  configured  Destination  Number.  Users  will  then  need  follow  the prompts in web GUI to help finish the detection. The default setting is "Auto Detect". Source Channel Select the channel to be detected. Destination Channel Select the channel to help detect when "Auto Detect" is used. Destination Number Configure the number to be called to help the detection.    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note:   The PSTN detection process will keep the call up for about 1 minute.   If "Semi-auto Detect' is used, please pick up the call only after informed from the web GUI prompt.   Once  the  detection  is  successful,  the  detected  parameters  "Busy  Tone",  "Polarity  Reversal"  and "Current  Disconnect  by  PSTN"  will  be  filled  into  the  corresponding  fields  in  the  analog  trunk configuration. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------   VOIP TRUNKS  VoIP trunks  can be configured  in UCM6200  under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->VoIP Trunks. Once  created,  the  VoIP  trunks  will  be  listed  with  Provider  Name,  Type,  Hostname/IP,  Username  and Options to edit/detect the trunk.    Click on "Create New SIP Trunk" or "Create New IAX Trunk" to add a new VoIP trunk.   Click on    to configure detailed parameters for the VoIP trunk.   Click on    to configure Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) for the SIP Trunk.   Click on    to start LDAP Sync.   Click on    to delete the VoIP trunk.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 154 of 321    For VoIP trunk example, please refer to the document in the following link: http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm_to_ucm_peer_guide.pdf  The VoIP trunk options are listed in the table below.  Table 49: Create New SIP Trunk Type Select the VoIP trunk type.   Peer SIP Trunk   Register SIP Trunk Provider Name Configure  a  unique  label  to  identify  this  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Host Name Configure  the  IP  address  or  URL  for  the  VoIP  provider’s  server  of  the trunk. Keep Original CID Keep  the  CID  from  the  inbound  call  when  dialing  out.  This  setting  will override “Keep Trunk CID” option. Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using “username” field from authentication line.     Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension’s CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is “No”. NAT Turn on this setting when the PBX is using public IP and communicating with  devices  behind  NAT.  If  there  is  one-way  audio  issue,  usually  it  is related to NAT configuration or SIP/RTP port support on the firewall. Disable This Trunk If checked, the trunk will be disabled.  Note: If a current SIP trunk is disabled, UCM will send UNREGISTER message (REGISTER message with expires=0) to the SIP provider. TEL URI If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be attached to the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Caller ID Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored.  When making  outgoing  calls,  the  following  rules  are  used  to  determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:   The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 155 of 321      If no CallerID is configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used.   If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound  CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. Need Registration Select whether the trunk needs to register on the external server or not when "Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. The default setting is No. Username Enter  the  username  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider  when "Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. Password Enter  the  password  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider  when "Register SIP Trunk" is selected. Auth ID Enter the Authentication ID for "Register SIP Trunk" type. Auto Record Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  trunk  (for  SIP  trunk only). The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files.  Table 50: SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Configure  a  unique  label  to  identify  this  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Host Name Configure  the  IP  address  or  URL  for  the  VoIP  provider’s  server  of  the trunk. Transport Configure the SIP transport protocol to be used in this trunk. The default setting is "All - UDP Primary".   UDP Only   TCP Only   TLS Only   All - UDP Primary: UDP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too.   All - TCP Primary: TCP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too.   All – TLS Primary: TLS is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. Keep Original CID Keep  the  CID  from  the  inbound  call  when  dialing  out.  This  setting  will override “Keep Trunk CID” option. Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using “username” field from authentication line.     Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension’s CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is “No”. NAT Turn on this option when the PBX is using public IP and communicating
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 156 of 321    with  devices  behind  NAT.  If  there  is  one-way  audio  issue,  usually  it’s related to NAT configuration or SIP/RTP port configuration on the firewall. Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled.  Note: If a current SIP trunk is disabled, UCM will send UNREGISTER message (REGISTER message with expires=0) to the SIP provider. TEL URI If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be attached to the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Need Registration Select whether the trunk needs to register on the external server or not when "Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. The default setting is No. Username Enter  the  username  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider  when "Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. Password Enter  the  password  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider  when "Register SIP Trunk" is selected. Auth ID Enter the Authentication ID for "Register SIP Trunk" type. Auto Record Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  trunk  (for  SIP  trunk only). The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Advanced Settings Codec Preference Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  The  available  codecs are: PCMU,  PCMA, GSM,  AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. From Domain Configure the actual domain name where the extension comes from. This can be used to override the From Header. For example, "trunk.UCM6200.provider.com" is the From Domain in From Header: sip:1234567@trunk.UCM6200.provider.com. From User Configure  the  actual  user  name  of  the  extension.  This  can  be  used  to override the From Header. There are cases where there is a single ID for registration (single trunk) with multiple DIDs. For  example,  "1234567"  is  the  From  User  in  From  Header: sip:1234567@trunk.UCM6200.provider.com. Send PPI Header If  enabled,  the  SIP  INVITE  message  sent  to  the  trunk  will  contain  PPI (P-Preferred-Identity) header. The default setting is “No”.  Note:
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 157 of 321    “Send  PPI  Header”  and  “Send  PAI  Header”  cannot  be  enabled  at  the same time. Only one of the two headers is allowed to be contained in the SIP INVITE message. Send PAI Header If  enabled,  the  SIP  INVITE  message  sent  to  the  trunk  will  contain  PAI (P-Asserted-Identity) header. The default setting is “No”.  Note: “Send  PPI  Header”  and  “Send  PAI  Header”  cannot  be  enabled  at  the same time. Only one of the two headers is allowed to be contained in the SIP INVITE message. Outbound Proxy Support Select to enable outbound proxy in this trunk. The default setting is "No". Outbound Proxy When outbound proxy support is enabled, enter the IP address or URL of the outbound proxy. DID Mode Configure where  to get the destination ID  of an  incoming SIP call, from SIP Request-line or To-header. The default is set to "Request-line". DTMF Mode Configure the default DTMF mode when sending DTMF on this trunk.   Default: The  global setting  of DTMF mode  will be  used.  The global setting  for  DTMF  Mode  setting  is  under  web  UI->PBX->SIP Settings->ToS.   RFC2833: Send DTMF using RFC2833.   Info: Send DTMF using SIP INFO message.   Inband: Send DTMF using inband audio. This requires 64 bit codec, i.e., PCMU and PCMA.   Auto: Send DTMF using RFC2833 if offered. Otherwise, inband  will be used. Enable Qualify If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". Qualify Timeout When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. Qualify Frequency When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  interval  (in seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call Lines The  maximum  number  of  concurrent  calls  using  the  trunk.  The  default settings 0, which means no limit. Fax Mode Select Fax mode. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 158 of 321    configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. SRTP Enable SRTP for the VoIP trunk. The default setting is "No". CC Settings Enable CC If enabled, the system will automatically alert the user when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. CC Max Agents Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for  this  channel.  In  other  words,  this  number  serves  as  the  maximum number  of  CC requests  this  channel is  allowed  to make.  The  minimum value is 1. CC Max Monitors Configure  the  maximum  number  of  monitor  structures  which  may  be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1.  Table 51: SIP Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Configure  a  unique  label  to  identify  this  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Host Name Configure  the  IP  address  or  URL  for  the  VoIP  provider’s  server  of  the trunk. Transport Configure the SIP transport protocol to be used in this trunk. The default setting is "All - UDP Primary".   UDP Only   TCP Only   TLS Only   All - UDP Primary: UDP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too.   All - TCP Primary: TCP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too.   All – TLS Primary: TLS is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. Keep Original CID Keep  the  CID  from  the  inbound  call  when  dialing  out,  this  setting  will override “Keep Trunk CID” option. Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using “username” field from authentication line.     Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension’s CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is “No”.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 159 of 321    NAT Turn on this option when the PBX is using public IP and communicating awith  devices  behind  NAT.  If  there  is  one-way  audio  issue,  usually  it’s related to NAT configuration or SIP/RTP port configuration on the firewall. Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled.  Note: If a current SIP trunk is disabled, UCM will send UNREGISTER message (REGISTER message with expires=0) to the SIP provider. TEL URI If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be attached to the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Caller ID Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. When making  outgoing  calls,  the  following  rules  are  used  to  determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:   The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first.   If no CallerID configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used.   If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound  CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. CallerID Name Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured. Auto Record Enable  automatic  recording  for  the  calls  using  this  trunk  (for  SIP  trunk only). The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Advanced Settings Codec Preference Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  The  available  codecs are: PCMU,  PCMA, GSM,  AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. DID Mode Configure where  to get the destination ID  of an  incoming SIP call, from SIP Request-line or To-header. The default is set to "Request-line". DTMF Mode Configure the default DTMF mode when sending DTMF on this trunk.   Default: The  global setting  of DTMF mode  will be  used.  The global setting  for  DTMF  Mode  setting  is  under  web  UI->PBX->SIP Settings->ToS.   RFC2833: Send DTMF using RFC2833.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 160 of 321      Info: Send DTMF using SIP INFO message.   Inband: Send DTMF using inband audio. This requires 64 bit codec, i.e., PCMU and PCMA.   Auto: Send DTMF using RFC2833 if offered. Otherwise, inband  will be used. Enable Qualify If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". Qualify Timeout When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. Qualify Frequency When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  interval  (in seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call Lines The  maximum  number  of  concurrent  calls  using  the  trunk.  The  default settings 0, which means no limite. Fax Mode Select Fax mode. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. SRTP Enable SRTP for the VoIP trunk. The default setting is "No". Sync LDAP Enable If enabled, the local UCM6200 will automatically provide and update the local LDAP contacts to the remote UCM6200 SIP peer trunk. In order to ensure  successful  synchronization,  the  remote  UCM6200  peer  also needs to enable this option on the SIP peer trunk. The default setting is "No". Sync LDAP Password This is the password used for LDAP contact file encryption and decryption during the LDAP sync process. The password must be the same on both UCM6200 peers o ensure successful synchronization. Sync LDAP Port Configure  the  TCP  port  used  LDAP  sync  feature  between  two  peer UCM6200. LDAP Outbound Rule Specify  an  outbound  rule  for  LDAP  sync  feature.  The  UCM6200  will automatically  modify  the  remote  contacts  by  adding  prefix  parsed  from this rule. LDAP Dialed Prefix Specify the prefix for LDAP sync feature. The UCM6200 will automatically modify the remote contacts by adding this prefix. CC Settings
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 161 of 321    Enable CC If enabled, the system will automatically alert the user when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. CC Max Agents Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for  this  channel.  In  other  words,  this  number  serves  as  the  maximum number  of  CC requests  this  channel  is allowed  to make.  The  minimum value is 1. CC Max Monitors Configure  the  maximum  number  of  monitor  structures  which  may  be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1.  Table 52: Create New IAX Trunk Type Select the VoIP trunk type.   Peer IAX Trunk   Register IAX Trunk Provider Name Configure  a  unique  label  to  identify  this  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Host Name Configure  the  IP  address  or  URL  for  the  VoIP  provider’s  server  of  the trunk. Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension's CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is "No". Username Enter  the  username  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider  when "Register IAX Trunk" type is selected. Password Enter  the  password  to  register  to  the  trunk  from  the  provider  when "Register IAX Trunk" type is selected. Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled.  Table 53: IAX Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Configure  a  unique  label  to  identify  this  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Host Name Configure  the  IP  address  or  URL  for  the  VoIP  provider’s  server  of  the trunk. Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension's CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is "No". Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. Caller ID Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 162 of 321    to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. When making  outgoing  calls,  the  following  rules  are  used  to  determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:   The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first.   If no CallerID configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used.   If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound  CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. CallerID Name Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured. Username Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider. Password Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider. Advanced Settings Codec Preference Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  The  available  codecs are: PCMU,  PCMA, GSM,  AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. Enable Qualify If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". Qualify Timeout When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. Qualify Frequency When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  interval  (in seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call Lines The  maximum  number  of  concurrent  calls  using  the  trunk.  The  default settings 0, which means no limited. Fax Mode Select Fax mode. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38.  Table 54: IAX Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Configure  a  unique  label  to  identify  this  trunk  when  listed  in  outbound rules, inbound rules and etc.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 163 of 321    Host Name Configure  the  IP  address  or  URL  for  the  VoIP  provider’s  server  of  the trunk. Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension's CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is "No". Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. Caller ID Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. When making  outgoing  calls,  the  following  rules  are  used  to  determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:   The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first.   If no CallerID configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used.   If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound  CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. CallerID Name Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured. Advanced Settings Codec Preference Select  audio  and  video  codec  for  the  VoIP  trunk.  The  available  codecs are: PCMU,  PCMA, GSM,  AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. Enable Qualify If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". Qualify Timeout When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. Qualify Frequency When  "Enable  Qualify"  option  is  set  to  "Yes",  configure  the  interval  (in seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call Lines The  maximum  number  of  concurrent  calls  using  the  trunk.  The  default settings 0, which means no limited. Fax Mode Select Fax mode. The default setting is “None”.   None: Disable Fax.   Fax  Detect:  Fax  signal  from  the  user/trunk  during  the  call  can  be detected  and  the  received  Fax  will  be  sent  to  the  Email  address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 164 of 321    DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)  The UCM6200 provides Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) which is a service of a local phone company (or local exchange carrier) that allows subscribers within a company's PBX system to connect to outside lines directly.  Example of how DOD is used:  Company ABC has a SIP trunk. This SIP trunk has 4 DIDs associated to it. The main number of the office is routed to an auto attendant. The other three numbers are direct lines to specific users of the company.   At the moment when a user makes an outbound call their caller ID shows up as the main office number.   This  poses  a  problem  as  the  CEO  would  like  their  calls  to  come  from  their  direct  line.  This  can  be accomplished by configuring DOD for the CEO’s extension.  Steps on how to configure DOD on the UCM6200:  1.  To setup DOD go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->VoIP Trunks page. 2.  Click    to access the DOD options for the selected SIP Trunk.   3.  Click "Create a new DOD" to begin your DOD setup 4.  For "DOD Number"  enter  one  of the  numbers  (DIDs)  from  your SIP  trunk  provider. In  the  example above Company ABC received 4 DIDs from their provider. ABC will enter in the number for the CEO's direct line. 5.  Select an extension from the "Available Extensions" list. Users have the option of selecting more than one  extension.  In  this  case,  Company  ABC  would  select  the  CEO's  extension.  After  making  the selection, click on the    button to move the extension(s) to the "Selected Extensions" list.     Figure 97: DOD extension selection
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 165 of 321    6.  Click "Save" at the bottom. Once completed, the  user  will return  to the  EDIT DOD  page that  shows all the extensions that  are associated to a particular DOD.     Figure 98: Edit DOD
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 166 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 167 of 321    SLA STATION  The  UCM6200  supports  SLA  that  allows  mapping  the  key  with  LED  on  a  multi-line  phone  to  different external lines. When there is an incoming call and the phone starts to ring, the LED on the key will flash in red and the call can be picked up by pressing this key. This allows users to know if the line is occupied or not.  The  SLA  function  on  the  UCM6200  is  similar  to  BLF  but  SLA  is  used  to  monitor  external  line  i.e., analog trunk on the UCM6200. Users could configure the phone with BLF mode on the MPK to monitor the analog trunk status or press the line key pick up call from the analog trunk on the UCM6200.  CREATE/EDIT SLA STATION    SLA Station can be configured on web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->SLA Station.   Figure 99: SLA Station    Click on “Create New SLA Station” to add a SLA Station.   Click  on    to  edit  the  SLA  Station.  The  following  table  shows  the  SLA  Station  configuration parameters.   Click on    to delete the SLA Station.  Table 55: SLA Station Configuration Parameters Station Name Configure a name to identify the SLA Station. Station Specify a SIP extension as a station that will be using SLA. Available SLA Trunks   Existing Analog Trunks with SLA Mode enabled will be listed here. Selected SLA Trunks Select a trunk for this SLA from the Available SLA Trunks list. Click on         to arrange the order. If there are multiple trunks selected, when there are calls on those trunks at the same time, pressing the LINE key on the phone will pick up the call on the first trunk here. SLA Station Options
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 168 of 321    Ring Timeout Configure  the  time  (in  seconds)  to  ring  the  station  before  the  call  is considered unanswered. No timeout is set by default. If set to 0, there will be no timeout.   Ring Delay Configure the time (in seconds) for delay before ringing the station when a call first coming in on the shared line. No delay is set by default. If set to 0, there will be no delay. Hold Access This option defines the competence of the hold action for one particular trunk. If set to “open”, any station could hold a call on that trunk or resume one held session; if set to “private”, only the station that places the trunk call on hold could resume the session. The default setting is “open”.   SAMPLE CONFIGURATION  1.  On the UCM6200, go to web UI->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks page. Create analog trunk or edit the existing analog trunk. Make sure “SLA Mode” is enabled for the analog trunk. Once enabled, this  analog  trunk  will  be  only  available  for  the  SLA  stations  created  under  web  UI->Basic/Call Routes->SLA Station page.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 169 of 321     Figure 100: Enable SLA Mode for Analog Trunk  Click on “Save”. The analog trunk will be listed with trunk mode “SLA”.   Figure 101: Analog Trunk with SLA Mode Enabled  2.  On the UCM6200, go to web UI->Basic/Call Routes->SLA Station page, click on “Create New SLA Station”. Please refer to section [CREATE/EDIT SLA STATION] for the configuration parameters. Users can  create  one  or  more  SLA  stations  to  monitor  the  analog  trunk.  The  following  figure  shows  two stations, 1002 and 1005, are configured to be associated with SLA trunk “fxo1”.   Figure 102: SLA Example - SLA Station 3.  On the SIP phone 1, configure to register UCM6200 extension 1002. Configure the MPK as BLF mode
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 170 of 321    and the value must be set to “extension_trunkname”, which is 1002_fxo1 in this case. 4.  On the SIP phone 2, configure to register UCM6200 extension 1005. Configure the MPK as BLF mode and value must be set to “extension_trunkname”, which is 1005_fxo1 in this case.   Figure 103: SLA Example - MPK Configuration  Now the SLA station is ready to use. The following functions can be achieved by this configuration.    Making an outbound call from the station/extension, using LINE key When the extension is in idle state, pressing the line key for this extension on the phone to off hook. Then dial the station’s extension number, for example, dial 1002 on phone 1 (or dial 1005 on phone 2), to hear the dial tone. Then the users could dial external number for the outbound call.   Making an outbound call from the station/extension, using BLF key When the extension is in idle state, pressing the MPK and users could dial external numbers directly.   Answering call using LINE key When the station is ringing, pressing the LINE key to answer the incoming call.   Barging-in active call using BLF key When there is  an active call between an SLA station and  an external number using the  SLA trunk, other  SLA  stations monitoring  the same  trunk could join  the call by pressing the  BLF  key if  “Barge Allowed” is enabled for the analog trunk.   Hold/Unhold using BLF key If the external line is previously put on hold by an SLA station, another station that monitors the same SLA trunk could unhold the call by pressing the BLF key if “Hold Access” is set to “open” on the analog trunk and the SLA station.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 171 of 321    CALL ROUTES OUTBOUND ROUTES  In the UCM6200, an outgoing calling rule pairs an extension pattern with a trunk used to dial the pattern. This allows different patterns to be dialed through different trunks (e.g., "Local" 7-digit dials through a FXO while "Long distance" 10-digit dials through a low-cost SIP trunk). Users can also set up a failover trunk to be used when the primary trunk fails.  Go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Outbound Routes to add and edit outbound rules.    Click on "Create New Outbound Rule" to add a new outbound route.   Click on    to edit the outbound route.   Click on    to delete the outbound route.   On the UCM6200, the outbound route priority is based on “Best matching pattern”. For example, the UCM6200 has outbound route A with pattern 1xxx and outbound route B with pattern 10xx configured. When  dialing  1000  for  outbound  call,  outbound  route  B  will  always  be  used  first.  This  is  because pattern 10xx is a better match than pattern 1xxx. Only when there are multiple outbound routes with the same pattern configured, users can click on    to move the outbound route up/down to arrange the priority among those outbound routes.  Table 56: Outbound Route Configuration Parameters Calling Rule Name Configure the name of the calling rule (e.g., local, long_distance, and etc). Letters, digits, _ and - are allowed. Pattern   All patterns are prefixed with the "_".   Special characters:   X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9. ".": Wildcard. Match one or more characters. "!": Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately. Example: [12345-9] - Any digit from 1 to 9. Password Configure the password for users to use this rule when making outbound calls. Call Duration Limit Enable to configure the maximum duration for the call using this outbound route.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 172 of 321    Maximum Call Duration Configure  the  maximum  duration  of  the  call  (in  seconds).  The  default setting is 0, which means no limit. Warning Time Configure the warning time for the call using this outbound route. If set to x seconds, the warning tone will be played to the caller when x seconds are left to end the call. Warning Repeat Interval Configure  the  warning  repeat  interval  for  the  call  using  this  outbound route. If set to x seconds, the warning tone will be played every x seconds after the first warning. Privilege Level Select privilege level for the outbound rule.   Internal: The lowest level required. All users can use this rule.   Local: Users with Local, National, or International level are allowed to use this rule.   National: Users with National or International level are allowed to use this rule.   International: The highest level required. Only users with international level can use this rule.   Disable: The default setting is "Disable". If selected, only the matched source caller ID will be allowed to use this outbound route.  Please be aware of the potential security risks when using "Internal" level, which  means  all  users  can  use  this  outbound  rule  to  dial  out  from  the trunk. Enable Filter on Source Caller ID When  enabled,  users  could  specify  extensions  allowed  to  use  this outbound  route.  "Privilege  Level"  is  automatically  disabled  if  using "Enable Filter on Source Caller ID". The following two methods can be used at the same time to define the extensions as the source caller ID. 1.  Select available extensions/extension groups from the left to the right. This allows users to specify arbitrary single extensions available in the PBX. 2.  Custom Dynamic Route: define the pattern for the source caller ID. This allows users to define extension range instead of selecting them one by one.   All patterns are prefixed with the "_".   Special characters:   X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9. ".": Wildcard. Match one or more characters. "!": Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 173 of 321    Example: [12345-9] - Any digit from 1 to 9. Send This Call Through Trunk Use Trunk Select the trunk for this outbound rule. Strip Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk. Example: The users will dial 9 as the first digit of a long distance calls. However, 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line. In this case, 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed. Prepend Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk. Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped. Use Failover Trunk Failover Trunk Failover  trunks  can  be  used  to  make  sure  that  a  call  goes  through  an alternate route, when the primary trunk is busy or down. If "Use Failover Trunk" is enabled and "Failover trunk" is defined, the calls that cannot be placed via the regular trunk may have a secondary trunk to go through.     Example: The user's primary trunk is a VoIP trunk and the user would like to use the PSTN  when  the  VoIP  trunk  is  not  available.  The  PSTN  trunk  can  be configured as the failover trunk of the VoIP trunk. Strip Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk. Example: The users will dial 9 as the first digit of a long distance calls. However, 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line. In this case, 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed. Prepend Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk. Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped.  INBOUND ROUTES  Inbound routes can be configured via Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Inbound Routes.    Click on "Create New Inbound Rule" to add a new inbound route.   Click on "Blacklist" to configure blacklist for all inbound routes.   Click on    to edit the inbound route.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 174 of 321      Click on    to delete the inbound route.  INBOUND RULE CONFIGURATIONS Table 57: Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters Trunks Select the trunk to configure the inbound rule. DID Pattern   All patterns are prefixed with the "_".   Special characters: X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9. ".": Wildcard. Match one or more characters. "!": Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately. Example: [12345-9] - Any digit from 1 to 9.  The pattern can be composed of two parts, divided by a ‘/’ character.   The first part is used to specify the dialed number the second part is used to specify the caller ID and it is optional, if set it means only the extension  with the  specific caller ID  is allowed to  call  in or  call  out.   For example, patter '_2XXX/1234' means the only extension with the caller ID '1234' is allowed to use this rule. Prepend Trunk Name Prepend trunk name to display Alert-Info Configure the Alert-Info, when UCM6200 receives an INVITE request, the Alert-Info header field specifies an alternative ring tone to the UAS.   Inbound Multiple Mode Multiple mode allows user to switch between destinations of the inbound rule  by  feature  codes.  Configure  related  feature  codes  in  the  “Feature Codes”  page.  If  this  option  is  enabled,  user  can  use  feature  code  to switch between different destinations. Default Destination Select the default destination for the inbound call.   Extension   Voicemail   Conference Room   Queue   Ring Group   Paging/Intercom   Voicemail Group   Fax   DISA   IVR   Dial By Name
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 175 of 321      External Number   By DID When  "By  DID"  is  used,  the  UCM6200  will  look  for  the  destination based  on  the  number  dialed,  which  could  be  local  extensions, conference,  call  queue,  ring  group,  paging/intercom  group,  IVR, voicemail  groups  and  Fax  extension  as  configured  in  "DID destination".  If the dialed  number  matches  the DID  pattern,  the call will be allowed to go through. Strip Configure the number of digits to be  stripped from the beginning of the DID. This option shows up only when "By DID" is selected. Prepend Configure  the  number  of  digits  to  be  prepended  to  an  inbound  DID pattern, with strip taking precedence over prepend. Dial Trunk This  option  shows  up  only  when  "By  DID"  is  selected.  If  enabled,  the external  users  dialing  in  to  the  trunk  via  this  inbound  route  can  dial outbound call using the UCM6200’s trunk. DID Destination This option shows up only when  "By DID" is selected. This controls the destination  that  can  be  reached  by  the  external  caller  via  the  inbound route. The DID destination are:   Extension   Conference   Call Queue   Ring Group   Paging/Intercom Groups   IVR   Voicemail Groups   Fax Extension   Dial By Name   All Time Condition Time Conditions Select the time condition for the inbound rule. Destination Select  the  destination  for  the  inbound  call  during  the  specified  time condition.  INBOUND ROUTE: PREPEND EXAMPLE  UCM6200 now allows user to prepend digits to an inbound DID pattern, with strip taking precedence over prepend. With the ability to prepend digits in inbound route DID pattern, user no longer needs to create multiple routes for the same trunk in order to route calls to different extensions.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 176 of 321     Figure 104: Inbound Route feature: Prepend  The following example demonstrates the process,  1.  If Trunk provides a DID pattern of 18005251163. 2.  If Strip is set to 8, UCM6200 will strip the first 8 digits.   3.  If  Prepend  is  set  to  2,  UCM6200  will  then  prepend  a  2  to  the  stripped  number,  now  the  number become 2163. 4. UCM6200 will now forward the incoming call to extension 2163.    INBOUND ROUTE: MULTIPLE MODE  In  the  UCM6200,  the  user can configure inbound route to enable multiple mode to switch between different destinations. The inbound multiple mode can be enabled under Inbound Route settings.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 177 of 321     Figure 105: Inbound Route - Multiple Mode  When Multiple Mode  is enabled for the inbound route, the user  can configure a  “Default Destination” and a “Mode 1” destination for this route. By default, the call coming into this inbound route will be routed to the default destination.  SIP end devices that have registered on the UCM6200 can dial feature code *62 to switch to inbound route “Mode 1” and dial feature code *61 to switch back to “Default Destination”. Switching between different mode can be easily done without web UI login.    For example, the customer service hotline destination has to be set to a different IVR after 7PM. The user can dial *62 to switch to “Mode 1” with that IVR set as the destination before off work.  FAX INTELLIGENT ROUTE  The UCM6200 can automatically detect Fax and phone signal coming from the FXO port, and then forward Fax or phone signal to the right destination. For example, when a regular phone call is coming, the UCM6200 will be able to detect the phone signal and forward it through the correct inbound route to the destination; if Fax signal is coming, the UCM6200 will be able to forward it to the FXS extension where the Fax machine is connected.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 178 of 321    FAX WITH TWO MEDIA The UCM6200 supports Fax re-invite with multiple codec negotiation. If a Fax re-invite contains both T.38 and PCMA/PCMU codec, UCM6200 will choose T.38 codec over PCMA/PCMU.  BLACKLIST CONFIGURATIONS  In the UCM6200, Blacklist is supported for all inbound routes. Users could enable the Blacklist feature and manage the Blacklist by clicking on "Blacklist".    Select the checkbox for "Blacklist Enable" to turn on Blacklist feature for all inbound routes. Blacklist is disabled by default.   Enter a number in "Add Blacklist Number" field and then click    to add to the list.   To remove a number from the Blacklist, select the number in "Blacklist list" and click on .  Figure 106: Blacklist Configuration Parameters    To add blacklist number in batch, click on    to upload blacklist file in csv format. The supported csv format is as below.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 179 of 321     Figure 107: Blacklist csv File    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  Note: Users could also add a number to the Blacklist or remove a number from the Blacklist by dialing the feature code for "Blacklist Add' (default: *40) and "Blacklist Remove" (default: *41) from an extension. The feature code can be configured under Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 180 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 181 of 321    CONFERENCE BRIDGE  The UCM6200 supports conference bridge allowing multiple bridges used at the same time:  UCM6202/6204  supports  up  to  3  conference  bridges  allowing  up  to  25  simultaneous  PSTN  or  IP participants.  UCM6208 supports up to 6 conference bridges allowing up to 32 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants. The  conference  bridge  configurations  can  be  accessed  under  Web  GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference. In this page, users could create, edit, view, invite, manage the participants and delete conference  bridges. The conference bridge status and conference call recordings  (if recording is enabled) will be displayed in this web page as well.  CONFERENCE BRIDGE CONFIGURATIONS    Click on "Create New Conference Room" to add a new conference bridge.   Click on    to edit the conference bridge.   Click on    to delete the conference bridge.    Table 58: Conference Bridge Configuration Parameters Extension Configure  the  conference  number  for  the  users  to  dial  into  the conference. Password When  configured,  the  users  who  would  like  to  join  the  conference  call must enter this password before accessing the conference bridge.  Note:   If "Public Mode" is enabled, the password is not required to join the conference bridge thus this field is invalid.   The password has to be at least 4 characters. Admin Password Configure  the  password  to  join  the  conference  bridge  as  administrator. Conference  administrator  can  manage  the  conference  call  via  IVR  (if "Enable Caller Menu" is enabled) as well as invite other parties to join the conference by dialing "0" (permission required from the invited party) or "1" (permission not required from the invited party) during the conference call.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 182 of 321    Note:   If "Public Mode" is enabled, the password is not required to join the conference bridge thus this field is invalid.   The password has to be at least 4 characters. Enable Caller Menu If  enabled,  conference  participant  could  press  the  *  key  to  access  the conference bridge menu. The default setting is "No". Record Conference If  enabled,  the  calls  in  this  conference  bridge  will  be  recorded automatically in a .wav format file. All the recording files will be displayed and can be downloaded in the conference web page. The default setting is "No". Quiet Mode If  enabled,  if  there  are  users  joining  or  leaving  the  conference,  voice prompt or notification tone won't be played. The default setting is "No".  Note: "Quiet  Mode"  and  "Announce  Callers"  cannot  be  enabled  at  the  same time. Wait For Admin If enabled, the participants will not hear each other until the conference administrator joins the conference. The default setting is "No".  Note: If "Quiet Mode" is enabled, the voice prompt for "Wait For Admin" will not be announced. Enable User Invite If  enabled,  users  could  press  0  to  invite  other  users  (with  the  users' permission) or press 1 to invite other users (without the user's permission) to join the conference. The default setting is "No".  Note: Conference administrator can always invite other users without enabling this option. Announce Callers If  enabled,  the  caller  will  be  announced  to  all  conference  participants when there the caller joins the conference. The default setting is "No".  Note: "Quiet  Mode"  and  "Announce  Callers"  cannot  be  enabled  at  the  same time. Public Mode If enabled, no authentication will be required when joining the conference call. The default setting is "Yes". Play Hold Music If enabled, the UCM6200 will play Hold music when there is only one user in the conference. The default setting is "No".
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 183 of 321    Music On Hold Select the music on hold class to be played in conference call. Music On Hold class can be set up under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Music On Hold. Skip Authentication When Inviting User via Trunk from Web GUI If  enabled,  the  invitation  from  Web  GUI  for  a  conference  bridge  with password  will  skip  the  authentication  for  the  invited  users.  The  default setting is "No".  JOIN A CONFERENCE CALL  Users could dial the conference bridge extension to join the conference. If password is required, enter the password to join the conference as a normal user, or enter the admin password to join the conference as administrator.  INVITE OTHER PARTIES TO JOIN CONFERENCE  When  using  the  UCM6200  conference  bridge,  there  are  two  ways  to  invite  other  parties  to  join  the conference.    Invite from Web GUI.  For each conference bridge in UCM6200 Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference, there is an icon   for option "Invite a participant". Click on it and enter the number of the party you would like to invite. Then click on "Add". A call will be sent to this number to join it into the conference.    Figure 108: Conference Invitation From Web GUI     Invite by dialing 0 or 1 during conference call.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 184 of 321    A conference participant can invite other parties to the conference by dialing from the phone during the conference call. Please make sure option "Enable User Invite" is turned on for the conference bridge first. Enter 0 or 1 during the conference call. Follow the voice prompt to input the number of the party you would like to invite. A call will be sent to this number to join it into the conference.  0: If 0 is entered to invite other party, once the invited party picks up the invitation call, a permission will be asked to "accept" or "reject" the invitation before joining the conference.   1: If 1 is entered to invite other party, no permission will be required from the invited party.   --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  Note: Conference administrator can always invite other parties from the phone during the call by entering 0 or 1. To join a conference bridge as  administrator, enter the admin password when joining the conference. A conference bridge can have multiple administrators. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------   DURING THE CONFERENCE  During the conference call, users can manage the conference from web GUI or IVR.    Manage the conference call from Web GUI.  Log in UCM6200 web GUI during the conference call, the participants in each conference bridge will be listed. 1.  Click on    to kick a participant from the conference. 2.  Click on    to mute the participant. 3.  Click on    to lock this conference bridge so that other users cannot join it anymore. 4.  Click on    to invite other users into the conference bridge.    Manage the conference call from IVR.  If "Enable Caller Menu" is enabled, conference participant can input * to enter the IVR menu for the conference. Please see options listed in the table below.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 185 of 321    Table 59: Conference Caller IVR Menu Conference Administrator IVR Menu 1 Mute/unmute yourself. 2 Lock/unlock the conference bridge. 3 Kick the last joined user from the conference. 4 Decrease the volume of the conference call. 5 Decrease your volume. 6 Increase the volume of the conference call. 7 Increase your volume. 8 More options.   1: List all users currently in the conference call.   2: Kick all non-Administrator participants from the conference call.   3: Mute/Unmute all non-Administrator participants from the conference call.   4: Record the conference call.   8: Exit the caller menu and return to the conference. Conference User IVR Menu 1 Mute/unmute yourself. 4 Decrease the volume of the conference call. 5 Decrease your volume. 6 Increase the volume of the conference call. 7 Increase your volume. 8 Exit the caller menu and return to the conference.    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: When there is participant in the conference, the conference bridge configuration cannot be modified. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------   RECORD CONFERENCE  The  UCM6200  allows  users  to  record  the  conference  call  and  retrieve  the  recording  from  web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 186 of 321    To record the conference call, when the conference bridge is in idle, enable "Record Conference" from the conference bridge configuration dialog. Save the setting and apply the change. When the conference call starts, the call will be automatically recorded in .wav format.  The  recording  files  will  be  listed  as  below  once  available.  Users  could  click  on    to  download  the recording or click on    to delete the recording.    Users could also delete all recording files by clicking on “Delate  All  Recording  Files”,  or  delete  multiple  recording  files  at  once  by  clicking  on  “Delete  Selected Recording Files” after selecting the recording files.   Figure 109: Conference Recording
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 187 of 321    CONFERENCE SCHEDULE CONFERENCE SCHEUDLE CONFIGURATION  Conference Schedule can be found under UCM6200 web UI->PBX->Call Features->Conference Schedule. Users can create, edit, view and delete a Conference Schedule.      Click on “Create New Conference Schedule” to add a new Conference Schedule.   Click on the scheduled conference to edit or delete the event.  After the user configures UCM6200 with Google Service Settings [GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT] and enables Google Calendar for Conference Schedule, the conference schedule on the UCM6200 can be synchronized with Google Calendar for authorized Google account.    Table 60: Conference Schedule Parameters Schedule Options Conference Topic Configure the name of the scheduled conference. Letters, digits, _ and - are allowed. Conference Room Select a conference room for this scheduled conference. Kick Time(m) Set  kick  time  before  conference  starts.  When  kick  time  is  reached,  a warning prompt will be played for all attendees  in the conference room. After 5 minutes, this conference room will be cleared and locked for the scheduled conference to begin.  Note:  Kick  Time  cannot  be  less  than  6  minutes  in  order  to  clear  the conference room.   Description The description of scheduled conference. Repeat Repeat  interval  of  scheduled  conference.  By  default  it’s  set  to  single event. Schedule Time Configure the beginning date and duration of scheduled conference.    Note:  Please  pay  attention  to  avoid  time  conflict  on  schedules  in  the same conference room.   Enable Google Calendar Select this option to sync scheduled conference with Google Calendar.    Note:  Google  Service  Setting  OAuth2.0  must  be  configured  on  the UCM6200.  Please  refer  to  section  [GOOGLE  SERVICE  SETTINGS SUPPORT].
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 188 of 321    Conference Administrator Select  the  administrator  of  scheduled  conference  from  selected extensions.  Note:   “Public Mode” must be disabled from Conference Room Options tab. Local Extension Select available extensions from the list to attend scheduled conference. Remote Extension Select available extensions from the remote peer PBX.  Note: “LDAP Sync”  must be  enabled on  the UCM6200 in  order to  view remote extensions here. Special Extension Add extensions that are not in the list (both local and remote list). If the user wishes to add the special extension, please match the pattern on the outbound route. Remote Conference Invite a remote conference.   Conference Room Options Password Configure conference room password. Please note that if “Public Mode” is enabled, this option is automatically disabled. Admin Password Configure the password to join as conference administrator. Please note that if “Public Mode” is enabled, this option is automatically disabled. Enable Caller Menu If  this  option  is  enabled,  conference  participants  will  be  able  to  access conference bridge menu by pressing the * key. Record Conference   If this option is enabled, conference call will be recorded in .wav format. The recorded file can be found from Conference page. Quiet Mode If this option is enabled, the notification tone or voice prompt for joining or leaving the conference won’t be played.  Note: Option  “Quiet  Mode” and  option  “Announce  Caller”  cannot  be enabled at the same time.   Wait For Admin If this option is enabled, the participants in the conference won’t be able to hear each other until conference administrator joins the conference.    Note:  If “Quiet  Mode”  is enabled,  voice  prompt  for  this  option  won’t  be played. Enable User Invite If this option is enabled, the user can:  Press  ‘0’  to  invite  others  to  join  the  conference  with  invited  party’s permission  Press ‘1’ to invite without invited party’s permission  Press  ‘2’ to  create  a multi-conference  bridge to  another conference room
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 189 of 321     Press ‘3’ to drop all current multi-conference bridges  Note: Conference Administrator is always allowed to access this menu. Announce Callers If  this  option  is  enabled,  when  a  participant  joins  the  conference  room, participant’s  name  will  be  announced  to  all  members  in  the  conference room.  Note:  Option  “Quiet  Mode” and  option  “Announce  Caller”  cannot  be enabled at the same time. Public Mode If  this  option  is  enabled,  no  authentication  is  required  for  entering  the conference room.  Note: Please be aware of the potential security risks when turning on this option. Play Hold Music If this option is enabled, UCM6200 will play Hold Music while there is only one  participant  in  the  conference  room  or  the  conference  is  not  yet started. Skip Authentication When Inviting Users via Trunk from Web GUI If  this  option  is  enabled,  the  invitation  from  Web  GUI  via  a  trunk  with password won’t require authentication.  Note: Please be aware of the potential security risks when turning on this option.    Cleaner Options Cleaner Options Enable Conference Schedules Cleaner If  this  option  is  enabled,  conference  schedules  will  be  automatically cleaned as configured. Conference Schedules Clean Time Enter the clean time (in hours). The valid range is from 0 to 23.   Clean Interval Enter the clean interval (in days). The valid range is from 1 to 30.    Show/hide Conference Schedule Table Enable this option will allow web UI to display scheduled conference in Conference Schedule Table. Please see figure below.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 190 of 321     Figure 110: Conference Schedule  Once the conference room is scheduled, at the kick time, all users will be removed from conference room and  no  extension  is  allowed  to  join  the  conference  room  anymore.  At  the  scheduled  conference  time, UCM6200 will send INVITE to the extensions that have been selected for conference.    ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------  Note:   Please  make  sure  that  outbound  route  is  properly  configured  for  remote  extensions  to  join  the conference.     Once Kick Time is reached, Conference Schedule is locked and cannot be modified.   --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 191 of 321    IVR CONFIGURE IVR  IVR configurations  can be  accessed  under the  UCM6200  Web  GUI->PBX->Call  Features->IVR.  Users could create, edit, view and delete an IVR.    Click on "Create New IVR" to add a new IVR.   Click on    to edit the IVR configuration.   Click on    to delete the IVR. Table 61: IVR Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Name Configure the name of the IVR. Letters, digits, _ and - are allowed. Extension Enter the extension number for users to access the IVR. DID Destination This option shows up only when  "By DID" is selected. This controls the destination  that  can  be  reached  by  the  external  caller  via  the  inbound route. The DID destination are:   Extension   Conference   Call Queue   Ring Group   Paging/Intercom Groups   Voicemail Groups   Fax Extension   Dial By Name   All Dial Trunk If enabled, all callers to the IVR is allowed to use trunk. The permission must be configured for the users to use the trunk first. The default setting is "No". Permission Assign permission level for outbound calls if "Dial Trunk" is enabled. The available  permissions  are  "Internal",  "Local",  "National"  and "International"  from  the  lowest  level  to  the  highest  level.  The  default setting is "Internal". If the user tries to dial outbound calls after dialing into the IVR, the UCM6200 will compared the IVR's permission level with the outbound  route's  privilege  level.  If  the  IVR's  permission  level  is  higher than  (or  equal  to)  the  outbound  route's  privilege  level,  the  call  will  be
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 192 of 321    allowed to go through. Welcome Prompt Select an audio file to play as the welcome prompt for the IVR. Click on "Prompt"  to  add  additional  audio  file  under  web  GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt. Digit Timeout Configure the timeout between digit entries. After the user enters a digit, the  user  needs  to  enter  the  next  digit  within  the  timeout.  If  no  digit  is detected  within  the  timeout,  the  UCM6200  will  consider  the  entries complete. The default timeout is 3 seconds. Response Timeout After playing the prompts in the IVR, the UCM6200 will wait for the DTMF entry within the timeout (in seconds). If no DTMF entry is detected within the  timeout,  a  timeout  prompt  will  be  played.  The  default  setting  is  10 seconds. Response Timeout Prompt Select the prompt message to be played when timeout occurs. Invalid Prompt Select  the  prompt  message  to  be  played  when  an  invalid  extension  is pressed. Response Timeout Repeat Loops Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if no DTMF input is detected.  When  the  loop  ends,  it  will  go  to  the  timeout  destination  if configured, or hang up. The default setting is 3. Invalid Repeat Loops Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if the DTMF input is invalid.  When  the  loop  ends,  it  will  go  to  the  invalid  destination  if configured, or hang up. The default setting is 3. Language Select  the  voice  prompt  language  to  be  used  for  this  IVR.  The  default setting  is  "Default"  which  is  the  selected  voice  prompt  language  under web  GUI->PBX->Internal  Options->Language.  The  dropdown  list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To  add  more  languages  in  the  list,  please  download  voice  prompt package  by  selecting  "Check  Prompt  List"  under  web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. Key Pressing Events Key Press Event: Press 0 Press 1 Press 2 Press 3 Press 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 Select the event for each key pressing for 0-9, *, Timeout and Invalid. The event options are:   Extension   Voicemail   Conference Rooms   Voicemail Group   IVR   Ring Group   Queues   Page Group
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 193 of 321    Press 9 Press * Timeout Invalid   Fax   Custom Prompt   Hangup   DISA   Dial By Name   External Number   Callback  CREATE CUSTOM PROMPT  To record new IVR prompt or upload IVR prompt to be used in IVR, click on “Prompt” next to the “Welcome Prompt”  option  and  the  users  will  be  redirected  to  Custom  Prompt  page.  Or  users  could  go  to  Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt page directly.  Figure 111: Click on Prompt to Create IVR Prompt  Once  the  IVR  prompt  file  is  successfully  added  to  the  UCM6200,  it  will  be  added  into  the  prompt  list options for users to select in different IVR scenarios.  RECORD NEW CUSTOM PROMPT   Settings In the UCM6200 web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt page, click on “Record New Custom Prompt” and follow the steps below to record new IVR prompt.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 194 of 321     Figure 112: Record New Custom Prompt    Specify the IVR file name.   Select the format (GSM or WAV) for the IVR prompt file to be recorded.   Select the extension to receive the call from the UCM6200 to record the IVR prompt.  Click  the “Record”  button.  A  request  will be  sent to  the  UCM6200.  The UCM6200  will then call the extension for recording the IVR prompt from the phone.   Pick up the call from the extension and start the recording following the voice prompt.   The recorded file will be listed in the IVR Prompt web page. Users could select to re-record, play or delete the recording.  UPLOAD CUSTOM PROMPT  If  the  user  has  a  pre-recorded  IVR  prompt  file,  click  on  “Upload  Custom  Prompt”  in  Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt page to upload the file to the UCM6200. The following are required for the IVR prompt file to be successfully uploaded and used by the UCM6200:   PCM encoded.   16 bits.   8000Hz mono.   In .mp3 or .wav format; or raw/ulaw/alaw/gsm file with .ulaw or .alaw suffix.   File size under 5M.  Figure 113: Upload Custom Prompt Click on    to select audio file from local PC and click on    to start uploading. Once uploaded, the file will appear in the Custom Prompt web page.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 195 of 321    LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT  The UCM6200 supports multiple languages in web GUI as well as system voice prompt. Currently, there are 16 languages supported in system voice prompt: English (United States), Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English (United Kingdom), French, German, Greek,  Hebrew, Italian, Polish,  Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish and Turkish.  English  (United  States)  and  Chinese  voice  prompts  are  built  in  with  the  UCM6200  already.  The  other languages  provided  by  Grandstream  can  be  downloaded  and  installed  from  the  UCM6200  web  GUI directly.  Additionally,  users  could  customize  their  own  voice  prompts,  package  them  and  upload  to  the UCM6200.  Language  settings  for  voice  prompt  can  be  accessed  under  Web  GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language.  DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL VOICE PROMPT PACKAGE  To download and install voice prompt package in different languages from UCM6200 web GUI, click on "Check Prompt List" button.   Figure 114: Language Settings for Voice Prompt  A new dialog window of voice prompt package list will be displayed. Users can see the version number (latest version available V.S. current installed version), package size and options to upgrade or download the language.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 196 of 321     Figure 115: Voice Prompt Package List  Click  on    to  download  the  language  to  the  UCM6200.  The  installation  will  be  automatically  started once the downloading is finished.   Figure 116: New Voice Prompt Language Added  A new language option will be displayed after successfully installed. Users then could select it to apply in the UCM6200 system voice prompt or delete it from the UCM6200.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 197 of 321    CUSTOMIZE SPECIFIC PROMPT On the UCM6200, if the user needs to replace some specific customized prompt, the user can upload a single specific customized prompt from web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language instead of the entire language pack.  Figure 117: Upload Single Voice Prompt for Entire Language Pack
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 198 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 199 of 321    VOICEMAIL CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL  If the voicemail is enabled for UCM6200 extensions, the configurations of the voicemail can be globally set up and managed under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Voicemail.  Table 62: Voicemail Settings Max Greeting Configure  the  maximum  number  of  seconds  for  the  voicemail  greeting. The default setting is 60 seconds. Dial ‘0’ For Operator If  enabled,  the  caller  can  press  0  to  exit  the  voicemail  application  and connect  to  the configured  operator’s  extension.  The  operator  extension can be configured under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General. Max Messages Per Folder Configure  the  maximum  number  of  messages  per  folder  in  users’ voicemail. The valid range 10 to 1000. The default setting is 50. Max Message Time Select  the  maximum  duration  of  the  voicemail  message.  The  message will not be recorded if the duration exceeds the max message time. The default setting is 15 minutes. The available options are:   1 minute   2 minutes   5 minutes   15 minutes   30 minutes   Unlimited Min Effective Message Time Configure  the  minimum  duration  (in  seconds)  of  a  voicemail  message. Messages will be automatically deleted if the duration is shorter than the Min  Message  Time.  The  default  setting  is  3  seconds.  The  available options are:   No minimum   1 second   2 seconds   3 seconds   4 seconds   5 seconds Note: Silence and noise duration are not counted in message time. Announce Message Caller-ID If  enabled,  the  caller  ID  of  the  user  who  has  left  the  message  will  be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message. The default setting
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 200 of 321    is "No". Announce Message Duration If enabled, the message duration will be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message. The default setting is "No". Play Envelope If enabled, a brief introduction (received time, received from, and etc) of each  message  will  be  played  when  accessed  from  the  voicemail application. The default setting is "Yes". Play from Last If  enabled,  UCM  will  play from  the  voice  message  left most  recently;  if disabled, UCM will play from the earliest left voice message Allow User Review If  enabled,  users  can  review  the  message  following  the  IVR  before sending the message out. The default setting is "No".  ACCESS VOICEMAIL  If the voicemail is enabled for UCM6200 extensions, the users can dial the voicemail access feature code (by default *98 or *97) to access the extension’s voicemail. The users will be prompt to enter the voicemail password  and  then  can  enter  digits  from  the  phone  keypad  to  navigate  in  the  IVR  menu  for  different options. Table 63: Voicemail IVR Menu Main Menu Sub Menu 1 Sub Menu 2 1 - New messages 3 - Advanced options 1 - Send a reply 2 - Call the person who sent this message 3 - Hear the message envelop 4 - Leave a message * - Return to the main menu 5 - Repeat the current message  7 - Delete this message 8 - Forward the message to another user 9 – Save * - Help # - Exit 2 - Change folders 0 - New messages 1 - Old messages 2 - Work messages 3 - Family messages 4 - Friend messages # - Cancel
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 201 of 321    3 - Advanced options 1 - Send a reply 2 - Call the person who sent this message 3 - Hear the message envelop 4 - Leave a message * - Return to    the main menu 0 - Mailbox options 1 - Record your unavailable message 1 - Accept this recording 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 2 - Record your busy message 1 - Accept this recording 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 3 - Record your name 1 - Accept this recording 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 4 - Record temporary greeting 1 - Accept this recording 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 5 - Change your password  * - Return to the main menu  VOICEMAIL EMAIL SETTINGS  The UCM6200 can be configured to send the voicemail as attachment to Email. Click on "Voicemail Email Settings" button to configure the Email attributes and content.  Table 64: Voicemail Email Settings Attach Recordings to E-Mail If  enabled,  voicemails  will  be sent  to  user's  Email  address. The  default setting is "Yes". Keep Recordings If enabled, voicemail will be stored in the UCM6200 after the email is sent. The default setting is “Yes”. Template For Voicemail Emails Fill  in  the  "Subject:"  and  "Message:"  content,  to  be  used  in  the  Email when sending to the user.  The template variables are:   \t: TAB   ${VM_NAME}: Recipient's first name and last name
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 202 of 321      ${VM_DUR}: The duration of the voicemail message   ${VM_MAILBOX}: The recipient's extension   ${VM_CALLERID}: The caller ID of the person who has left the message   ${VM_MSGNUM}: The number of messages in the mailbox   ${VM_DATE}: The date and time when the message is left   Figure 118: Voicemail Email Settings  Click on "Load Default Settings" button to view the default template as an example.  CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL GROUP  The  UCM6200  supports  voicemail  group  and  all  the  extensions  added  in  the  group  will  receive  the voicemail  to  the  group  extension.  The  voicemail  group  can  be  configured  under  Web  GUI->PBX->Call Features->Voicemail Group. Click on "Create New Voicemail Group" to configure the group.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 203 of 321       Figure 119: Voicemail Group  Table 65: Voicemail Group Settings Extension Enter the Voicemail Group Extension. The voicemail messages left to this extension will be forwarded to all the voicemail group members. Name Configure the Name to identify the voicemail group. Letters, digits, _ and - are allowed. Voicemail Password Configure the voicemail password for the users to check voicemail messages. Email Address Configure the Email address for the voicemail group extension. Voicemail Group Mailboxes Select available mailboxes from the left list and add them to the right list. The extensions need to have voicemail enabled to be listed in available mailboxes list.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 204 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 205 of 321    RING GROUP  The UCM6200 supports ring group feature with different ring strategies applied to the ring group members. This section describes the ring group configuration on the UCM6200.  CONFIGURE RING GROUP  Ring group settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Ring Group.    Figure 120: Ring Group    Click on “Create New Ring Group” to add ring group.   Click on    to edit the ring group. The following table shows the ring group configuration parameters.   Click on    to delete the ring group. Table 66: Ring Group Parameters Ring Group Name Configure ring group name to identify the ring group. Letters, digits, _ and – are allowed. Extension Configure the ring group extension. Ring Group Members Select available users from the left side to the ring group member list on the right side. Click on          to arrange the order. Selected LDAP Numbers Select available remote users from the left side to the ring group member list on  the right side.  Click  on          to  arrange the  order. Note: LDAP Sync must be enabled first. Ring Strategy Select the ring strategy. The default setting is “Ring in order”.   Ring simultaneously.   Ring all the members at the same time when there is incoming call to the ring group extension. If any of the member answers the call, it will stop ringing.   Ring in order.   Ring the members with the order configured in ring group list. If the first  member  doesn’t  answer  the  call,  it  will  stop  ringing  the  first member and start ringing the second member.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 206 of 321    Custom Prompt This  option  is  to  set  a  custom  prompt  for  a  ring  group  to  announce  to caller.  Click  on  ‘Prompt’,  it  will  direct  to  the  page  PBX->Internal Options->Custom  Prompt,  where  users  could  record  new  prompt  or upload prompt files. Ring Timeout on Each Member Configure the number of seconds to ring each member. If set to 0, it will keep ringing. The default setting is 30 seconds. Note: The actual ring timeout might be overridden by users if the phone has ring timeout settings as well. Auto Record If  enabled,  calls  on  this  ring  group  will  be  automatically  recorded.  The default  setting  is  No.  The  recording  files  can  be  accessed  from  web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Enable Destination If enabled, users could select extension, voicemail, ring group, IVR, call queue, voicemail group as the destination if the call to the ring group has no answer. Secret and Email address are required if voicemail is selected as the destination. Secret Configure the password to access the ring group extension's voicemail.   Note: The password has to be at least 4 characters. Email Address Configure  the  Email  address  of  the  ring  group  extension's  voicemail.  If "Attach  Recordings  to  E-mail"  is  enabled  from  Web GUI->PBX->Voicemail->Voicemail  Email  Settings,  the  voicemail  can be sent to the ring group's Email address as attachment.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 207 of 321     Figure 121: Ring Group Configuration  REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP  Remote extensions from the peer trunk of a remote UCM6200 can be included in the ring group with local extension. An example of Ring Group with peer extensions is presented in the following:    1.  Creating SIP Peer Trunk between both UCM6200_A and UCM6200_B. SIP Trunk can be found under web UI-> PBX-> Basic/Call Routes-> VoIP Trunks. Also, please configure their Inbound/Outbound routes accordingly. 2.  Click  edit  button  in  the  menu  ,  and  check  if  Sync  LDAP  Enable  is  selected,  this option  will allow  UCM6200_A  update remote  LDAP server  automatically  from  peer UCM6200_B. In addition, Sync LDAP Password must match for UCM6200_A and UCM6200_B in order to sync LDAP contact  automatically.  Port  number  can  be  anything  between  0~65535,  and  use  the  outbound  rule created in step 1 for the LDAP Outbound Rule option.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 208 of 321     Figure 122: Sync LDAP Server option  3.  In case if LDAP server doesn’t sync automatically, user can manually sync LDAP server. Under VoIP Trunks page, click  sync button  shown  in the following figure to manually sync  LDAP contacts from peer UCM6200.   Figure 123: Manually Sync LDAP Server
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 209 of 321    4.  Under  Ring  Groups  setting  page,  click .  Ring  Groups  can  be  found under web UI-> PBX-> Call Features-> Ring Groups. 5.  If  LDAP  server  is  synced  correctly,  Available  LDAP  Numbers  box  will  display  available  remote extensions that can be included in the current ring group. Please also make sure the extensions in the peer UCM6200 can be included into that UCM6200’s LDAP contact.    Figure 124: Ring Group Remote Extension
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 210 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 211 of 321    PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP  Paging  and  Intercom  Group  can  be  used  to  make  an  announcement  over  the  speaker  on  a  group  of phones. Targeted phones will answer immediately using speaker. The UCM6200 paging and intercom can be used via feature code to a single extension or a paging/intercom group. This sections describes the configuration of paging/intercom group under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Paging/Intercom.  CONFIGURE PAGING/INTERCOM GROUP    Click on "Create New Paging/Intercom Group" to add paging/intercom group.   Figure 125: Paging/Intercom Group  Table 67: Paging/Intercom Group Configuration Parameters Name Configure paging/intercom group name. Extension Configure the paging/intercom group extension. Type Select "2-way Intercom" or "1-way Page". Custom Prompt This  option  is  to  set  a  custom  prompt  for  a  paging/intercom  group  to announce  to  caller.  Click  on  ‘Prompt’,  it  will  direct  to  the  page PBX->Internal  Options->Custom  Prompt,  where  users  could  record new prompt or upload prompt files. Page/Intercom Group Members Select  available  users  from  the  left  side  to  the  paging/intercom  group member list on the right.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 212 of 321      Click on    to edit the paging/intercom group.   Click on    to delete the paging/intercom group.   Click on "Paging/Intercom Group Settings" to edit Alert-Info Header. This header will be included in the SIP INVITE message sent to the callee in paging/intercom call.   Figure 126: Page/Intercom Group Settings    The UCM6200 has pre-configured paging/intercom feature code. By default, the Paging Prefix is *81 and the Intercom Prefix is *80. To edit page/intercom feature code, click on "Feature Codes" in the "Paging/Intercom  Group  Settings"  dialog.  Or  users  could  go  to  Web  GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes directly.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 213 of 321    CALL QUEUE  The  UCM6200  supports  call  queue  by  using  static  agents  or  dynamic  agents.  Call  Queue  system  can accept  more  calls  than  the  available  agents.  Incoming  calls  will  be  held  until  next  representative  is available in the system. This section describes the configuration of call queue under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue.    CONFIGURE CALL QUEUE  Call queue settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue.   Figure 127: Call Queue    Click on "Create New Queue" to add call queue.   Click  on    to edit  the call  queue.  The  call  queue configuration  parameters are  listed  in  the  table below. Table 68: Call Queue Configuration Parameters Extension Configure the call queue extension. Name Configure the call queue name to identify the call queue. Strategy Select the strategy for the call queue.   Ring All Ring all available Agents simultaneously until one answers.   Linear Ring agents in the specified order.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 214 of 321      Least Recent Ring the agent who has been called the least recently.   Fewest Calls Ring the agent with the fewest completed calls.   Random Ring a random agent.   Round Robin Ring the agents in Round Robin scheduling with memory.  The default setting is "Ring All". Music On Hold Select the Music On Hold class for the call queue.  Note: Music On Hold classes can be managed from Web GUI-> PBX->Internal Options->Music On Hold. Leave When Empty Configure whether the callers will be disconnected from the queue or not if the queue has no agent anymore. The default setting is "Strict".   Yes Callers will be disconnected from the queue if all agents are paused or invalid.  No Never  disconnect  the  callers  from  the  queue  when  the  queue  is empty.   Strict Callers will be disconnected from the queue if all agents are paused, invalid or unavailable. Dial in Empty Queue Configure whether the callers can dial into a call queue if the queue has no agent. The default setting is "No".   Yes Callers can always dial into a call queue.  No Callers cannot dial into a queue if all agents are paused or invalid.   Strict Callers cannot dial into a queue if  the agents are paused, invalid or unavailable. Dynamic Login Password If enabled,  the configured  PIN number is  required  for dynamic  agent to log in. The default setting is disabled. Ring Time Out Configure the number of seconds an agent will ring before the call goes to the next agent. The default setting is 15 seconds. Wrapup Time Configure the number of seconds before a new call can  ring the queue
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 215 of 321    after the last call on the agent is completed. If set to 0, there will be no delay between calls to the queue. The default setting is 15 seconds. Max Queue Length Configure  the  maximum  number  of  calls  to  be  queued  at  once.  This number does not include calls that have been connected with agents. It only  includes  calls  not  connected  yet.  The  default  setting  is  0,  which means unlimited. When the maximum value is reached, the caller will be treated with busy tone followed by the next calling rule after attempting to enter the queue. Report Hold Time If enabled, the UCM6200 will report (to the agent) the duration of time of the call before the caller is connected to the agent. The default setting is "No". Wait Time If  enabled,  users  will  be  disconnected  after  the  configured  number  of seconds. The default setting is "No".  Note: It  is  recommended  to  configure  "Wait  Time"  longer  than  the  "Wrapup Time". Auto Record If enabled, the calls on the call queue will be automatically recorded. The recording  files  can  be  accessed  in  Queue  Recordings  under  web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue. Enable Destination If  enabled,  the  incoming  call  for  the  call  queue  will  be  routed  to  the destination configured in the next field if none of the agents answers the call after ringing for a time of “Ring Timeout”. Queue Timeout Configure the global timeout (in seconds) of call queue. It must be bigger than the value of ring timeout. The call in the queue will be transferred to the failover destination directly if this time is exceeded.   Failover Destination Configure the call destination for the call to be routed to if no agent in this call queue answers the call. Enable Feature Codes Enable feature codes option for call queue. For example, *83 is used for “Agent Pause” Agents Select  the  available  users  to  be  the  static  agents  in  the  call  queue. Choose from the available users on the left to the static agents list on the right. Click on          to arrange the order.    Click on    to delete the call queue.   Click  on  "Agent  Login  Settings"  to  configure  Agent  Login  Extension  Postfix  and  Agent  Logout Extension Postfix. Once configured, users could log in the call queue as dynamic agent.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 216 of 321     Figure 128: Agent Login Settings  For example, if the call queue extension is 6500, Agent Login Extension Postfix is * and Agent Logout Extension Postfix  is **, users could dial  6500* to  login to  the call queue  as dynamic agent  and dial 6500** to logout from the call queue. Dynamic agent doesn't need to be listed as static agent and can log in/log out at any time.    Call  queue  feature  code  "Agent  Pause"  and  "Agent  Unpause"  can  be  configured  under  Web GUI->PBX->Internal  Options->Feature  Codes.  The  default  feature  code  is  *83  for  "Agent  Pause" and *84 for "Agent Unpause".   Queue  recordings are  shown on the Call Queue  page.  Click  on    to download  the recording  file in .wav format; click on    to delete the recording file. To delete multiple recording files by one click, select several recording files to be deleted and click on “Delete Selected Recording Files” or click on “Delete All Recording Files” to delete all recording files.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 217 of 321    EXTENSION GROUPS  The  UCM6200  extension  group  feature  allows  users  to  assign  and  categorize  extensions  in  different groups  to  better  manage  the  configurations  on  the  UCM6200.  For  example,  when  configuring  "Enable Filter on Source Caller ID", users could select a group instead of each person's extension to assign. This feature simplifies the configuration process and helps manage and categorize the extensions for business environment.  CONFIGURE EXTENSION GROUPS  Extension group can be configured via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Extension Groups.    Click on "Create New Extension Group" to create a new extension group.   Click on    to edit the extension group. Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side.   Figure 129: Edit Extension Group    Click on    to delete the extension group.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 218 of 321    USING EXTENSION GROUPS  Here  is  an  example  where  the  extension  group  can  be  used.  Go  to  Web  GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Outbound Routes and select "Enable Filter on Source Caller ID". Both single  extensions and extension groups will show up for users to select.   Figure 130: Select Extension Group in Outbound Route
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 219 of 321    PICKUP GROUPS  The  UCM6200  supports  pickup  group  feature  which  allows  users  to  pick  up  incoming  calls  for  other extensions if they are in the same pickup group, by dialing "Pickup Extension" feature code (by default *8).  CONFIGURE PICKUP GROUPS  Pickup groups can be configured via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Pickup Groups.    Click on "Create New Pickup Group" to create a new pickup group.   Click on    to edit the pickup group. Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side.   Figure 131: Edit Pickup Group    Click on    to delete the pickup group.  CONFIGURE PICKUP FEATURE CODE  When picking up the call for the pickup group member, the user only needs to dial the pickup feature code. It’s not necessary to add the extension number after the pickup feature code. The pickup feature code is configurable under Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes.  The default pickup feature code is *8.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 220 of 321     Figure 132: Edit Pickup Feature Code
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 221 of 321    MUSIC ON HOLD  Music On Hold settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Music On Hold. In this page, users could configure music on hold class and upload music files. The "default" Music On Hold class already has 5 audio files defined for users to use.   Figure 133: Music On Hold Default Class    Click on "Create New MOH Class" to add a new Music On Hold class.   Click on    to configure the MOH class sort method to be "Alpha" or "Random" for the sound files.   Click on    next to the selected Music On Hold class to delete this Music On Hold class.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 222 of 321      Click  on    to  select  music  file  from  local  PC  and  click  on    to  start  uploading.  The  music  file uploaded has to be 8 KHz Mono format with size smaller than 5M.   Click on    next to the sound file to delete it from the selected Music On Hold Class.   Select the sound files and click on    to delete all selected  music on hold files.    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: Once the MOH file is deleted, there are two ways to recover the music files.   Users could download the MOH file from this link: http://downloads.asterisk.org/pub/telephony/sounds/releases/asterisk-moh-opsound-wav-2.03.tar.gz   After downloading and unzip the pack, users could then upload the music files to UCM.     Factory reset could also recover the MOH file on the UCM. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 223 of 321    FAX/T.38  The  UCM6200  supports  T.30/T.38  Fax  and  Fax  Pass-through.  It  can  convert  the  received  Fax  to  PDF format  and  send  it  to  the  configured  Email  address.  Fax/T.38  settings  can  be  accessed  via  Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->FAX/T.38. The list of received Fax files will be displayed in the same web page for users to view, retrieve and delete.  CONFIGURE FAX/T.38    Click on "Create New Fax Extension". In the popped up window, fill the extension, name and Email address to send the received Fax to.   Click on "Fax Settings" to configure the Fax parameters.  Table 69: FAX/T.38 Settings Enable Error Correction Mode Configure to enable Error Correction Mode (ECM) for the Fax. The default setting is "Yes". Maximum Transfer Rate Configure the maximum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation. The possible  values  are  2400,  4800,  7200,  9600,  12000  and  14400.  The default setting is 14400. Minimum Transfer Rate Configure the minimum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation. The possible  values  are  2400,  4800,  7200,  9600,  12000  and  14000.  The default setting is 2400. Max Concurrent Sending Fax Configure the concurrent fax that can be  sent by UCM6200. Two mode “Only” and “More” are supported.   Only Under this mode, the UCM6200 allows only single user to send fax at a time.   More Under  this  mode,  the  UCM6200  supports  multiple  concurrent  fax sending by the users.  By default, this option is set to “only”. Fax Queue Length Configure the maximum length  of Fax Queue from  6 to 10.  The default setting is 6. Default Email Address Configure the Email address to send the received Fax to if user's Email address cannot be found. Note:
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 224 of 321    The extension's Email address or the Fax's default Email address needs to be configured in order to receive Fax from Email. If neither of them is configured, Fax will be not be received from Email. Template Variables Fill  in  the  "Subject:"  and  "Message:"  content,  to  be  used  in  the  Email when sending the Fax to the users.   The template variables are:   ${CALLERIDNUM} : Caller ID Number   ${CALLERIDNAME} : Caller ID Name   ${RECEIVEEXTEN} : The extension to receive the Fax   ${FAXPAGES} : Number of pages in the Fax   ${VM_DATE} : The date and time when the Fax is received    Click on    to edit the Fax extension.   Click on    to delete the Fax extension.  SAMPLE CONFIGURATION TO RECEIVE FAX FROM PSTN LINE  The following instructions describe how to use the UCM6200 to receive Fax from PSTN line on the Fax machine connected to the UCM6200 FXS port.  1.  Connect Fax machine to the UCM6200 FXS port. 2.  Connect PSTN line to the UCM6200 FXO port. 3.  Go to web GUI->PBX->Analog Trunks page. 4.  Create or edit the analog trunk for Fax as below.  Fax Mode: Make sure "Fax Mode" option is set to "None".
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 225 of 321     Figure 134: Configure Analog Trunk without Fax Detection  5.  Go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions page. 6.  Create or edit the extension for FXS port.  Analog Station: Select FXS port to be assigned to the extension. By default, it's set to "None".   Once  selected,  analog  related  settings  for  this  extension  will  show  up  in  "Analog  Settings" section.   Figure 135: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: FXS Extension
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 226 of 321     Figure 136: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: Analog Settings  7.  Go to web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Inbound Routes page. 8.  Create an inbound route to use the Fax analog trunk. Select the created extension for Fax machine in step 4 as the default destination.   Figure 137: Configure Inbound Rule for Fax
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 227 of 321    Now the Fax configuration is done. When there is an incoming Fax calling to the PSTN number for the FXO port, it will send the Fax to the Fax machine.  SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR FAX-TO-EMAIL  The  following  instructions  describe  a  sample  configuration  on  how  to  use  Fax-to-Email  feature  on  the UCM6200.  1.  Connect PSTN line to the UCM6200 FXO port. 2.  Go to UCM6200 web GUI->Internal Options->Fax/T.38 page. Create a new Fax extension.   Figure 138: Create Fax Extension  3.  Go to  UCM6200  web GUI->Basic/Call  Routes->Analog  Trunks page. Create  a new  analog trunk. Please make sure "Fax Detection" is set to "No". 4.  Go to UCM6200 web GUI->Basic/Call Routes->Inbound Routes page. Create a new inbound route and set the default destination to the Fax extension.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 228 of 321     Figure 139: Inbound Route to Fax Extension  5.  Once successfully configured, the incoming Fax from external Fax machine to the PSTN line number will be converted to PDF file and sent to the Email address Faxtest@ucm6200mycompany.com as attachment.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 229 of 321    ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE (RESTRICTED ACCESS)  The  UCM6200  supports  Asterisk  Manager  Interface  (AMI)  with  restricted  access.  AMI  allows  a  client program  to  connect  to  an  Asterisk  instance  commands  or  read  events  over  a  TCP/IP  stream.  It’s particularly useful when the system admin tries to track the state of a telephony client inside Asterisk.  User could configure AMI parameters on UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->AMI. For details on how to use AMI on UCM6200, please refer to the following AMI guide:  http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm6200_AMI_guide.pdf      ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Warning:   Please do not enable AMI on the UCM6200 if it is placed on a public or untrusted network unless you have taken steps to protect the device from unauthorized access. It is crucial to understand that AMI access can allow AMI user to originate calls and the data exchanged via AMI is often very sensitive and private for your UCM6200 system. Please be cautious when enabling AMI access on the UCM6200 and restrict the permission  granted  to  the  AMI  user.  By  using  AMI  on  UCM6200  you  agree  you  understand  and acknowledge the risks associated with this. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 230 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 231 of 321    BUSY CAMP-ON  The UCM6200 supports busy camp-on/call completion feature that allows the PBX to camp on a called party and inform the caller as soon as the called party becomes available given the previous attempted call has failed.  The configuration and instructions on how to use busy camp-on/call completion feature can be found in the following guide:  http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm6200_busy_camp_on_guide.pdf
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 232 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 233 of 321    FOLLOW ME  Follow Me is a feature on the UCM6200 that allows users to direct calls to other phone numbers and have them  ring all  at once or  one  after the  other.  Calls  can  be directed  to  users’  home  phone, office  phone, mobile and etc. The calls will get to the user no matter where they are. Follow Me option can be found under web GUI-> PBX-> Call Features->Follow Me.  To configure follow me:    Click on "Create New Follow Me" and then select an extension to be configured with Follow Me.    Figure 140: Create Follow Me   Click on “Next” to continue editing Follow Me configuration.  Figure 141: Edit Follow Me
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 234 of 321     Click  on  “Add  Follow  Me  Number”  to  add  local  extensions  or  external  numbers  to  be  called  after ringing the extension selected in the first step.     Once created, it will be displayed on the follow me web page list. Click on    to edit the Follow Me configuration. Click on    to delete the Follow Me.  The following table shows the Follow Me configuration parameters.  Table 70: Follow Me Settings Enable Configure to enable or disable Follow Me for this user. Skip Trunk Auth If  external  number  is  added  in  the  Follow  Me,  please  make  sure  this option  is  enabled  or  the  “Skip  Trunk  Auth”  option  of  the  extension  is enabled, otherwise the external Follow Me number cannot be reached.   Music On Hold Class Configure  the  Music  On  Hold  class  that  the  caller  would  hear  while tracking the user. Confirm When Answering By default it is enabled and user will be asked to press 1 to accept the call or to press 2 to reject the call after answering a Follow Me call. If it is disabled, the Follow Me call will be established once after the user answers it. Enable Destination When enabled, the call will be routed to the default destination if no one in the Follow Me extensions answers the call. Default Destination Configure the destination if no one in the Follow Me extensions answers the call. The available options are:     Extension   Voicemail   Queues   Ring Group   Voicemail Group   IVR   External Number Follow Me Numbers The  added  numbers  are  listed  here.  Click  on        to  arrange  the order.  Click  on    to  delete  the  number.  Click  on    to  add  new numbers. New Follow Me Number Add  a  new  Follow  Me  number  which  could  be  a  ‘Local  Extension’  or ‘External Number’. The selected dial plan should have permissions to dial the defined external number.   Dialing Order Select  the  order  in  which  the  Follow  Me  destinations  will  be  dialed  to reach the user: ring all at once or ring one after the other.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 235 of 321      Click on “Follow Me Options” to enable or disable the options listed in the following table.  Table 71: Follow Me Options Playback Incoming Status Message If  enabled,  the  PBX  will  playback  the  incoming  status  message  before starting the Follow Me steps. Record the Caller’s Name If enabled, the PBX will record the caller’s name from the phone so it can be announced to the callee in each step. Playback Unreachable Status Message If enabled, the PBX will playback the unreachable status message to the caller if the callee cannot be reached.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 236 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 237 of 321    ONE-KEY DIAL  The UCM6200 supports One-Key Dial that allows users to call a certain destination by pressing one digit 0 to 9 on the keypad. This creates a system-wide speed dial access for all the extensions on the UCM6200.  To enable One-Key Dial, on the UCM6200 web GUI, go to page PBX->Call Features->One-Key Dial.   Figure 142: Configure One-Key Dial  User should first decide a digit used for One-Key Dial and check the option “Enable Destination”  for the digit.    Then  select  a  dial  destination  from  “Default  Destination”.  The  supported  destinations  include extension,  voicemail,  conference  room,  voicemail  group,  IVR,  ring  group,  call  queue,  page  group,  fax, DISA, Dial by Name and external number.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 238 of 321     Figure 143: One-Key Dial Destinations
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 239 of 321    DISA  In many situations the user will find the need to access his own IP PBX resources but he is not physically near one of his extensions. However, he does have access to his own cell phone. In this case we can use what is commonly known as DISA (Direct Inward System Access). Under this scenario the user will be able to call from the outside, whether it’s using his cell phone, pay phone, regular PSTN, etc. After calling into UCM6200, the user can then dial out via the SIP trunk or PSTN trunk connected to UCM6200 as it is an internal extension.    The UCM6200 supports DISA to be used in IVR or inbound route. Before using it, create new DISA under web GUI->Call Features->DISA.    Click on "Create New IVR" to add a new DISA.   Click on    to edit the DISA configuration.   Click on    to delete the DISA.  Figure 144: Create New DISA  Table 72: DISA Settings Name Configure DISA name to identify the DISA. Password Configure the password (digit only) required for the user to enter before using DISA to dial out.  Note: The password has to be at least 4 digits.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 240 of 321    Permission Configure  the permission  level for DISA.  The  available  permissions are "Internal", "Local", "National" and  "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". If the user tries to dial outbound  calls  after dialing  into the  DISA,  the  UCM6200  will  compared the DISA's permission level with the outbound route's privilege level. If the DISA's permission level is higher than (or equal to) the outbound route's privilege level, the call will be allowed to go through. Response Timeout Configure  the  maximum  amount  of  time  the  UCM6200  will  wait  before hanging up if the user dials an incomplete or invalid number. The default setting is 10 seconds. Digit Timeout Configure  the  maximum  amount  of  time  permitted between  digits  when the user is typing the extension. The default setting is 5 seconds. Allow Hangup If enabled, during an active  call, users can enter the  UCM6200 hangup feature code (by default it's *0) to disconnect the call or hang up directly. A new dial tone will be heard shortly for the user to make a new call. The default setting is "No".   Once successfully created, users can configure the inbound route destination as "DISA" or IVR key event as "DISA". When dialing into DISA, users will be prompted with password first. After entering the correct password, a second dial tone will be heard for the users to dial out.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 241 of 321    CALLBACK FEATURE  Callback  is  mainly  designed  for  users  who  often  use  their  mobile  phones  to  make  long  distance  or international  calls  which  may  have  high  service  charges.  The  callback  feature  provides  an  economic solution for reduce the cost from this.  The callback feature works as follows:  1. Configure a new callback on the UCM6200. 2.  On the UCM6200, configure destination of the inbound route for analog trunk to callback. 3.  Save and apply the settings. 4.  The user calls the PSTN number of  the UCM6200  using the mobile phone,  which goes  to callback destination as specified in the inbound route. 5.  Once the user hears the ringback tone from the mobile phone, hang up the call on the mobile phone. 6.  The UCM6200 will call back the user. 7.  The user answers the call. 8.  The call will be sent to DISA or IVR which directs the user to dial the destination number. 9.  The user will be connected to the destination number.  In this way, the calls are placed and connected through trunks on the UCM6200 instead of to the mobile phone  directly.  Therefore,  the  user  will  not  be  charged  on  mobile  phone  services  for  long  distance  or international calls.  To configure callback on the UCM6200, go to web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Callback page and click on  . Configuration parameters are listed in the following table.  Table 73: Callback Configuration Parameters Name Configure a name to identify the Callback. CallerID Pattern Configure the pattern of the callers allowed to use this callback. The caller who places the inbound call needs to have the callerID match this pattern so that the caller can get callback after hanging up the call.  Note: If leaving as blank, all numbers are allowed to use this callback. Outbound Prepend Configure  the  prepend  digits  to  be  added  at  before  dialing  the  outside number.  The  number  with  prepended  digits  will  be  used  to  match  the outbound route. ‘-’ is the connection character which will be ignored.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 242 of 321    Delay Before Callback Configure the number of seconds to be delayed before calling back the user. Destination Configure the destination which the callback will direct the caller to. Two destinations are available:   IVR   DISA The  caller  can  then enter  the  desired  number  to  dial out  via  UCM6200 trunk.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 243 of 321    BLF AND EVENT LIST BLF  The  UCM6200  supports  BLF  monitoring  for  extensions,  ring  group,  call  queue,  conference  room  and parking lot. For example, on the user's phone, configure the parking lot number 701 as the BLF monitored number. When there is a parked call on 701, the LED for this BLF key will light up in red, meaning a call is parked against this parking lot. Pressing this BLF key can pick up the call from this parking lot.   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: On the Grandstream GXP series phones, the MPK supports "Call Park" mode, which can be used to park the call by configuring the MPK number as call park feature code (e.g., 700). MPK "Call Park" mode can also be used to monitor and pickup parked call if the MPK number is configured as parking lot (e.g., 701). ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------   EVENT LIST  Besides BLF, users can also configure the phones to monitor event list. In this way, both local extensions on the same UCM6200 and remote extensions on the VOIP trunk can be monitored. The event list setting is under web GUI->Call Features->Event List.    Click on "Create New Event List" to add a new event list.   Click on    to edit the event list configuration.   Click on    to delete the event list. Table 74: Event List Settings URI Configure  the  name  of  this  event  list  (for  example,  office_event_list). Please note the URI name cannot be the same as the extension name on the UCM6200. The valid characters are letters, digits, _ and -. Local Extensions Select  the  available  extensions/Extension  Groups  listed  on  the  local UCM6200 to be monitored in the event list. Remote Extensions If LDAP sync is enabled between the UCM6200 and the peer UCM6200, the remote extensions will be listed under "Available Extensions". If not,
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 244 of 321    manually enter the remote extensions under "Special Extensions" field. Special Extensions Manually  enter  the  remote  extensions  in  the  peer/register  trunk  to  be monitored in the event list. Valid format: 5000,5001,9000   Figure 145: Create New Event List  Remote  extension  monitoring  works  on  the  UCM6200  via  event  list  BLF,  among  Peer  SIP  trunks  or Register  SIP  trunks  (register  to  each  other).  Therefore,  please  properly  configure  SIP  trunks  on  the UCM6200 first before using remote BLF feature. Please note the SIP end points need support event list BLF in order to monitor remote extensions.  When an event list is created on the UCM6200 and remote extensions are added to the list, the UCM6200 will send out SIP SUBSCIRBE to the remote UCM6200 to obtain the remote extension status. When the SIP end points registers and subscribes to the local UCM6200 event list, it can obtain the remote extension status from this event list.  Once successfully configured, the event list page will show the status of total extension and subscribers for each event list. Users can also select the event URI to check the monitored extension's status and the subscribers' details.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 245 of 321      ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note:   To configure LDAP sync, please go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->VoIP Trunk. You will see "Sync LDAP Enable" option. Once enabled, please configure password information for the remote peer UCM6200 to connect to the local UCM6200. Additional information such as port number, LDAP outbound rule, LDAP Dialed Prefix will also be required. Both the local UCM6200 and remote UCM6200  need  enable  LDAP  sync  option  with  the  same  password  for  successful  connection  and synchronization.   Currently LDAP sync feature only works between two UCM6200s.     (Theoretically)  Remote  BLF  monitoring  will  work  when  the  remote  PBX  being  monitored  is non-UCM6200  PBX.  However,  it  might  not  work  the  other  way  around  depending  on  whether  the non-UCM6200 PBX supports event list BLF or remote monitoring feature. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 246 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 247 of 321    DIAL BY NAME  Dial By Name is a feature on the PBX that allows caller to search a person by first or last name via his/her phone's keypad. The administrator can define the Dial By Name directory including the desired extensions in the directory and the searching type by "first name" or "last name". After dialing in, the PBX IVR/Auto Attendant  will  guide  the  caller  to  spell  the  digits  to  find  the  person  in  the  Dial  By  Name  directory.  This feature allows customers/clients to use the guided automatic system to get  in touch  with the enterprise employees  without  having  to  know  the  extension  number,  which  brings  convenience  and  improves business image for the enterprise.  DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION  The administrators can create the dial by name group under web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Dial By Name.   Figure 146: Create Dial By Name Group
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 248 of 321    1. Group Name  Enter the Group Name. This is to identify the Dial By Name group. The Dial By Name group can be used as the destination for inbound route and key pressing event for IVR. The group name defined here will show up in the destination list when configuring IVR and inbound route. If Dial By Name is set as a key pressing event for IVR, user could use ‘*’ to exit from Dial By Name, then re-enter IVR and start a new event. The following example shows how to use this option.   Figure 147: Dial By Name Group In IVR Key Pressing Events
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 249 of 321     Figure 148: Dial By Name Group In Inbound Rule  2. Extension  Configure the direct dial extension for the Dial By Name group.  3. Available Extensions/Selected Extensions  Select available extensions from the left side to the right side as the directory for the Dial By Name group. Only the selected extensions here can be reached by the Dial By Name IVR when dialing into this group. The extensions here must have a valid first name and last name configured under web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions in order to be searchable in Dial By Name directory through IVR. By specifying the extensions here, the administrators can make sure unscreened calls will not reach the company employee if he/she doesn't want to receive them directly.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 250 of 321     Figure 149: Configure Extension First Name and Last Name  4. Query Type  Specify the query type. This defines how the caller will need to enter to search the directory. By First Name: enter the first 3 digits of the first name to search the directory. By Last Name: enter the first 3 digits of the last name to search the directory. By Full Name: enter the first 3 digits of the first name or last name to search the directory.  5. Select Type  Specify the select type on the searching result. The IVR will confirm the name/number for the party the caller would like to reach before dialing out.  By Order: After the caller enters the digits, the IVR will announce the first matching party's name and number. The caller can confirm and dial out if it's the destination party, or press * to listen to the next matching result if it's not the desired party to call. By Menu: After the caller enters the digits, the IVR will announce 8 matching results. The caller can press number 1 to 8 to select and call, or press 9 for results in next page.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 251 of 321    ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR  The active calls on the UCM6200 are displayed in web UI->Status->Active Calls page. Users can monitor the status, hang up the call as well as barge in the active calls in real time manner.  ACTIVE CALLS STATUS  To view the status of active calls, navigate to web GUI->Status->Active Calls. The following figure shows extension 1000 is calling 1001. 1001 is ringing.   Figure 150: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls - Ringing  The following figure shows the call between 1000 and 1001 is established.   Figure 151: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls – Call Established
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 252 of 321    In active call web page, click on    to refresh the active call status.  HANG UP ACTIVE CALLS To hang up an active call, click on    icon in the active call dialog. Users can also click on   to hang up all active calls.  CALL MONITOR During an active call, click on icon    and the monitor dialog will pop up.  Figure 152: Configure to Monitor an Active Call  In the “Monitor” dialog, configure the following to monitor an active call:  1. Enter an available extension for “Monitor’s Extension” which will be used to monitor the active call. 2. “Monitored Extension” must be one of the parties in the active call to be monitored.   3. Select spy mode. There are three options in “Spy Mode”.   Listen In “Listen” mode, the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call but the audio of the user on this extension will not be heard by either party in the monitored active call.   Whisper In “Whisper” mode, the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call. The user on this  extension can only talk  to the selected monitored extension  and he/she  will not be heard by the other party in the active call. This can be usually used to supervise calls.   Barge In “Barge” mode, the extension monitoring the call can talk to both parties in the active call. The call will be established similar to three-way conference.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 253 of 321    4. Enable or disable “Require Confirmation” option. If enabled, the confirmation of the invited monitor’s extension is required before the active call can be monitored. This option can be used to avoid adding participant who has auto-answer configured or call forwarded to voicemail. 5. Click on “Add”. An INVITE will be sent to the monitor’s extension. The monitor can answer the call and start monitoring. If “Require Confirmation” is enabled, the user will be asked to confirm to monitor the call.  Another way to monitor active calls is to dial the corresponding feature codes from an extension. Please refer to [Table 75: UCM6200 Feature Codes] and [ENABLE SPY] section for instructions.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 254 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 255 of 321    CALL FEATURES  The UCM6200 supports call recording, transfer, call forward, call park and other call features via feature code. This section lists all the feature codes in the UCM6200 and describes how to use the call features.  FEATURE CODES Table 75: UCM6200 Feature Codes Feature Maps Blind Transfer   Default code: #1.   Enter the code during active call. After hearing "Transfer", you will  hear  dial  tone.  Enter  the  number  to  transfer  to.  Then  the user will be disconnected and transfer is completed.   Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Attended Transfer   Default code: *2.   Enter the code during active call. After hearing "Transfer", you will hear the dial tone. Enter the number to transfer to and the user  will  be  connected  to  this  number.  Hang  up  the  call  to complete the attended transfer.   Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Disconnect   Default code: *0.   Enter the code during active call. It will disconnect the call.   Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 256 of 321    Call Park   Default code: #72.   Enter the code during active call to park the call.   Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Audio Mix Record   Default code: *3.   Enter  the  code  followed  by  #  or  SEND  to  start  recording  the audio call and the UCM6200  will mix  the streams  natively on the fly as the call is in progress.   Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. DND/Call Forward Do Not Disturb (DND) Activate   Default code: *77. Do Not Disturb (DND) Deactivate   Default code: *78. Call Forward Busy Activate   Default Code: *90.   Enter the code and follow the voice prompt. Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call.   Call Forward Busy Deactivate   Default Code: *91. Call Forward No Answer Activate   Default Code: *92.   Enter the code and follow the voice prompt. Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call. Call Forward No Answer Deactivate   Default Code: *93. Call Forward Unconditional Activate   Default Code: *72.   Enter the code and follow the voice prompt. Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call. Call Forward Unconditional Deactivate   Default Code: *73. Feature Misc
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 257 of 321    Feature Code Digits Timeout   Default Setting: 1000.   Configure the maximum interval (in milliseconds) between the digits input to activate the feature code.   Call Park   Default Extension: 700.   During an active call, initiate blind transfer and then enter this code to park the call. Parked Lots   Default Extension: 701-720.   These  are the  extensions  where the  calls  will be  parked,  i.e., parking lots that the parked calls can be retrieved. Use Parklot as Extension   If checked, the parking lot number can be used as extension. The user can transfer the call to the parking lot number to park the  call.  Please  note  this  parking  lot  number  range  might conflict with extension range. Parking Timeout (s)   Default setting: 300.   This  is  the  timeout  allowed  for  a  call  to  be  parked.  After  the timeout, if the call is not picked up, the extension who parks the call will be called back. Feature Codes Voicemail Access Code   Default Code: *98.   Enter *98 and follow the voice prompt. Or dial *98 followed by the  extension  and  #  to  access  the  entered  extension's voicemail box. My Voicemail   Default Code: *97.   Press *97 to access the voicemail box. Agent Pause   Default Code: *83.   Pause the agent in all call queues. Agent Unpause   Default Code: *84.   Unpause the agent in all call queues. Paging Prefix   Default Code: *81.   To page an extension, enter the code followed by the extension number. Intercom Prefix   Default Code: *80.   To  intercom  an  extension,  enter  the  code  followed  by  the extension number.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 258 of 321    Blacklist Add   Default Code: *40.   To  add  a  number  to  blacklist  for  inbound  route,  dial  *40  and follow the voice prompt to enter the number. Blacklist Remove   Default Code: *41.   To remove a number  from  current blacklist  for  inbound route, dial *41 and follow the voice prompt to remove the number. Call Pickup on Ringing   Default Code: **.   To pick up a call for any extension xxxx, enter the code followed by the extension number xxxx. Pickup Extension   Default Code: *8.   This  code  is  for  the  pickup  group  which  can  be  assigned  for each extension on the extension configuration page.   If  there  is  an  incoming  call  to  an  extension,  the  other extensions within the same pickup group can dial *8 directly to pick up the call. Direct Dial Voicemail Prefix   Default Code: *   This  code  is  for  the  user  to  directly  dial  or  transfer  to  an extension's voicemail.   For  example,  directly  dial  *5000  will  have  to  call  go  into  the extension 5000's voicemail. If the user would like to transfer the call  to  the  extension  5000's  voicemail,  enter  *5000  as  the transfer target number. Call Completion Request   Default Code: *11   This code is for the user who wants to use Call Completion to complete a call. Call Completion Cancel   Default Code: *12   This code is for the user who wants to cancel Call Completion request. Enable Spy Check this box to enable spy feature codes. Listen Spy This  is  the  feature  code  to  listen  in  on  a  call  to  monitor performance.  Monitor’s  line  will  be  muted,  and  neither  party  will hear from the monitor’s extension. The default setting is *54. Whisper Spy This  is  the  feature  code  to  speak  to  one  side  of  the  call  (for example, whisper  to employees  to help them  handle a  call). Only one  side  will  be  able  to  hear  from  the  monitor’s  extension.  The default setting is *55.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 259 of 321    Barge Spy This is the feature code to join in on the call to assist both parties. The default setting is *56. Enable Inbound Multiple Mode If enabled, user can switch between different inbound route modes with feature code. By default, this option is disabled. Inbound Default Mode This feature code is used to switch inbound route mode to default mode. The default setting is *61. Inbound Mode 1 This feature code is used to switch inbound route mode to mode 1. The default setting is *62.   CALL RECORDING  The UCM6200 allows users to record audio during the call. If "Auto Record" is turned on for an extension, ring group, call queue or trunk, the call will be automatically recorded when there is established call with it. Otherwise, please follow the instructions below to manually record the call.  1.  Make sure the feature code for "Audio Mix Record" is configured and enabled.  2.  After establishing the call, enter the "Audio Mix Record" feature code (by default it's *3) followed by # or SEND to start recording.  3.  To stop the recording, enter the "Audio Mix Record" feature code (by default it's *3) followed by # or SEND again. Or the recording will be stopped once the call hangs up. 4.  The recording file can be retrieved under Web GUI->Status->CDR. Click on    to play the recording or click on    to download the recording file.   Figure 153: Download Recording File from CDR Page
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 260 of 321    The above recorded call's recording files are also listed under the UCM6200 web GUI->CDR->Recording Files.   Figure 154: Download Recording File from Recording Files Page  CALL PARK  The UCM6200 provides call park and call pickup features via feature code.  PARK A CALL  There are two feature codes that can be used to park the call.    Feature Maps->Call Park (Default code #72) During an active call, press #72 and the call will be parked. Parking lot number (default range 701 to 720) will be announced after parking the call.    Feature Misc->Call Park (Default code 700) During an active call, initiate blind transfer (default code #1) and then dial 700 to park the call. Parking lot number (default range 701 to 720) will be announced after parking the call.  RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL  To retrieve the parked call, simply dial the parking lot number and the call will be established. If a parked call is not retrieved after the timeout, the original extension who parks the call will be called back.  ENABLE SPY  If “Enable Spy” option is enabled, feature codes for Listen Spy, Whisper Spy and Barge Spy are available for users to dial from any extension to perform the corresponding actions.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 261 of 321     Assume a call is on-going  between extension A and  extension B, user could dial the feature code from extension C to listen on their call (*54 by default), whisper to one side (*55 by default), or barge into the call (*56 by default). Then the user will be asked to enter the number to call, which should be either side of the active call, extension A or B in this example.      ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Caution: “Enable Spy” allows any user to listen to any call by feature codes. This may result in the leakage of user privacy. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 262 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 263 of 321    INTERNAL OPTIONS  This section describes internal options that haven't been mentioned in previous sections yet. The settings in this section can be applied globally to the UCM6200, including general configurations, jitter buffer, RTP settings,  ports  config  and  STUN  monitor.  The  options  can  be  accessed  via  Web  GUI->PBX->Internal Options-> General.  INTERNAL OPTIONS/GENERAL  Table 76: Internal Options/General General Preferences Global OutBound CID Configure the global CallerID used for all outbound calls when no other CallerID  is  defined  with  higher  priority.  If  no  CallerID  is  defined  for extension or trunk, the global outbound CID will be used as CallerID. Global OutBound CID Name Configure  the  global  CallerID  Name  used  for  all  outbound  calls.  If configured,  all  outbound  calls  will  have  the  CallerID  Name  set  to  this name. If not, the extension's CallerID Name will be used. Operator Extension Specify the operator extension, which will be dialed when users press 0 to exit  voicemail  application.  The  operator  extension  can  also  be  used  in IVR option. Ring Timeout Configure  the  number  of  seconds  to  ring  an  extension  before  the  call goes to the user's voicemail box. The default setting is 60.    Note: This is the global value used for each extension if "Ring Timeout" field is left empty on the extension configuration page.     Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. Record Prompt If  enabled,  users  will  hear  voice  prompt  before  recording  is  started  or stopped.  For  example,  before  recording,  the  UCM6200  will  play  voice prompt "The call will be recorded". The default setting is "No". Extension Preferences Enforce Strong Passwords If enabled, strong password will be enforced for the password created on the UCM6200. The default setting is enabled.  Strong Password Rules: 1.  Password for voicemail, voicemail group, outbound route, DISA, call queue  and  conference  requires  non-repetitive  and  non-sequential
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 264 of 321    digits,  with  a  minimum  length  of  4  digits.  Repetitive  digits  pattern (such as 0000, 1111, 1234, 2345, and etc), or common digits pattern (such as 111222, 321321 and etc) are not allowed to be configured as password.  2.  Password for extension registration, web GUI admin login, LDAP and LDAP sync requires alphanumeric characters containing at least two categories of the following, with a minimum length of 4 characters.   Numeric digits   Lowercase alphabet characters   Uppercase alphabet characters   Special characters Enable Random Password If  enabled,  random  password  will  be  generated  when  the  extension  is created. The  default setting is "Yes". It  is recommended to enable it for security purpose. Enable Auto Email To User If  enabled,  UCM6200  will  send  Email  notification  to  user  automatically after editing extension settings or adding a new extension.   Disable Extension Range If  set  to  "Yes",  users  could  disable  the  extension  range pre-configured/configured on the UCM6200. The default setting is "No".  Note: It is recommended to keep the system assignment to avoid inappropriate usage and unnecessary issues. Extension Ranges The default extension range assignment is:    User Extensions: 1000-6299 User  Extensions  is  referring  to  the  extensions  created  under  web UI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions page.    Pick Extensions: 4000-4999 This refers to the extensions  that can be manually  picked  from end device  when  being  provisioned  by  the  UCM6200.  There  are  two related  options  in  zero  config  page->Auto  Provision  Settings,  "Pick Extension  Segment"  and  "Enable  Pick  Extension".  If  "Enable  Pick Extension"  under  zero  config  settings  is selected,  the  extension  list defined  in  "Pick  Extension  Segment"  will  be  sent  out  to  the  device after receiving the  device's  request. This "Pick  Extension Segment" should be a subset of the "Pick Extensions" range here. This feature is for the GXP series  phones that support selecting extension to  be provisioned via phone's LCD.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 265 of 321       Auto Provision Extensions: 5000-6299 This sets the range for "Zero Config Extension Segment" which is the extensions  can  be  assigned  on  the  UCM6200  to  provision  the  end device.    Conference Extensions: 6300-6399   Ring Group Extensions: 6400-6499   Queue Extensions: 6500-6599   Voicemail Group Extensions: 6600-6699   IVR Extensions: 7000-7100   Dial By Name Extensions: 7101-7199   Fax Extensions: 7200-8200    INTERNAL OPTIONS/JITTER BUFFER  Table 77: Internal Options/Jitter Buffer SIP Jitter Buffer Enable Jitter Buffer Select to enable jitter buffer on the sending side of the SIP channel. The default setting is "No". Jitter Buffer Size Configure the time (in ms) to buffer. This is the jitter buffer size used in "Fixed" jitter  buffer, or  used as the initial time for  "adaptive" jitter buffer. The default setting is 100. Max Jitter Buffer Configure the maximum time (in ms) to buffer for "Adaptive" jitter buffer implementation,  or  used  as  the  jitter  buffer  size  for  "Fixed"  jitter  buffer implementation. The default setting is 200. Implementation Configure  the  jitter  buffer  implementation  on  the  sending  side  of  a  SIP channel. The default setting is "Fixed".  Fixed The size is always equal to the value of "Max Jitter Buffer".  Adaptive The size is adjusted automatically and the maximum value equals to the value of "Max Jitter Buffer".
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 266 of 321    INTERNAL OPTIONS/RTP SETTINGS  Table 78: Internal Options/RTP Settings RTP Start Configure the RTP port starting number. The default setting is 10000.   RTP End Configure the RTP port ending address. The default setting is 20000. Strict RTP Configure  to  enable  or  disable  strict  RTP  protection.  If  enabled,  RTP packets  that  do  not  come  from  the  source  of  the  RTP  stream  will  be dropped. The default setting is "Disable". RTP Checksums Configure  to  enable  or  disable  RTP  Checksums  on  RTP  traffic.  The default setting is "Disable". ICE Support Configure whether to support ICE. The default setting is enabled.  ICE is the integrated use of STUN and TURN structure to provide reliable VoIP or video calls and media transmission, via a SIP request/ response model  or  multiple  candidate  endpoints  exchanging  IP  addresses  and ports, such as private addresses and TURN server address. STUN Server Configure  STUN  server  address.  STUN  protocol  is  a  Client/Server  and also  a  Request/Response  protocol.  It’s  used  to  check  the  connectivity between  the  two  terminals,  such  as  maintaining  a  NAT  binding  entries keep-alive agreement. The default STUN Server is stun.ipvideotalk.com.  Valid format: [(hostname | IP-address) [':' port] The default port number is 3478 if not specified.   INTERNAL OPTIONS/PAYLOAD  The UCM6200 payload type for audio codecs and video codes can be configured here.  Table 79: Internal Options/Payload AAL2-G.726 Configure  payload  type  for  ADPCM  (G.726,  32kbps,  AAL2  codeword packing). The default setting is 112. DTMF Configured payload type for DTMF. The default setting is 101.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 267 of 321    G.721 Compatible Configure to enable/disable G.721 compatible. The default setting is Yes. G.726 Configure the payload type for  G.726 if "G.721 Compatible" is  disabled. The default setting is 111. iLBC Configure the payload type for iLBC. The default setting is 97. H.264 Configure the payload type for H.264. The default setting is 99. H.263P Configure the payload type for H.263+. The default setting is 100 103. VP8 Configure the payload type for VP8. The default settings is 108.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 268 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 269 of 321    IAX SETTINGS  The UCM6200 IAX global settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->IAX Settings.  IAX SETTINGS/GENERAL Table 80: IAX Settings/General Bind Port Configure the port number that the IAX2 will be allowed to listen to. The default setting is 4569. Bind Address Configure the address that the IAX2 will be forced to bind to. The default setting is 0.0.0.0, which means all addresses. IAX1 Compatibility Select to configure IAX1 compatibility. The default setting is "No". No Checksums If selected,  UDP checksums will be  disabled and  no checksums  will be calculated/checked  on  systems  supporting  this  features.  The  default setting is "No". Delay Reject If  enabled,  the  IAX2  will delay the rejection  of  calls to  avoid  DOS.  The default setting is "No". ADSI Select to enable ADSI phone compatibility. The default setting is "No". Music On Hold Interpret Specify  which  Music  On  Hold  class  this  channel  would  like  to  listen  to when being put on hold. This music class is only effective if this channel has no music class configured and the bridged channel putting the call on hold has no "Music On Hold Suggest" setting. Music On Hold Suggest Specify  which  Music  On  Hold  class  to  suggest  to  the  bridged  channel when putting the call on hold. Bandwidth Configure the bandwidth for IAX settings. The default setting is "Low".  IAX SETTINGS/REGISTRATION Table 81: IAX Settings/Registration IAX Registration Options Min Reg Expire Configure  the  minimum  period  (in  seconds)  of  registration.  The  default setting is 60. Max Reg Expire Configure  the maximum  period (in  seconds)  of  registration.  The  default setting is 3600. IAX Thread Count Configure the number of IAX helper threads. The default setting is 10. IAX Max Thread Count Configure  the  maximum  number  of  IAX  threads  allowed.  The  default setting is 100.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 270 of 321    Auto Kill If  set  to  "yes",  the  connection  will  be  terminated  if  ACK  for  the  NEW message is not received within 2000ms. Users could also specify number (in milliseconds) in addition to "yes" and "no". The default setting is "yes". Authentication Debugging If enabled,  authentication traffic in debugging will not  show. The default setting is "No".   Codec Priority Configure codec negotiation priority. The default setting is "Reqonly".   Caller Consider the callers preferred order ahead of the host's.   Host Consider the host's preferred order ahead of the caller's.   Disabled Disable the consideration of codec preference all together.   Reqonly This  is  almost  the  same  as  "Disabled",  except  when  the requested format is not available. The call will only be accepted if the requested format is available.   Type of Service Configure ToS bit for preferred IP routing. IAX Trunk Options Trunk Frequency Configure  the  frequency  of  trunk  frames  (in  milliseconds).  The  default setting is 20. Trunk Time Stamps If  enabled,  time  stamps  will  be  attached  to  trunk  frames.  The  default setting is "No".  IAX SETTINGS/STATIC DEFENSE  Table 82: IAX Settings/Static Defense Call Token Optional Enter a single IP address (e.g., 11.11.11.11) or a range of IP addresses (11.11.11.11/22.22.22.22) for which call token validation is not required. Max Call Numbers Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for a single IP address. Max Unvalidated Call Numbers Configure the maximum number of unvalidated calls for all IP addresses. Call Number Limits Configure to limit the number of calls for a give IP address of IP range. IP or IP Range Enter  the  IP  address  (11.11.11.11)  or  a  range  of  IP  addresses (11.11.11.11/22.22.22.22) to be considered for call number limits.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 271 of 321    SIP SETTINGS  The UCM6200 SIP global settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->SIP Settings.  SIP SETTINGS/GENERAL Table 83: SIP Settings/General Realm For Digest Authentication Configure  the  host  name  or  domain  name  for  the  UCM6200.  Realms MUST be  globally  unique  according  to RFC3261. The default setting is Grandstream. Bind UDP Port Configure the UDP port used for SIP. The default setting is 5060. Bind IP Address Configure the IP address to bind to. The default setting is 0.0.0.0, which means binding to all addresses. Allow Guest Calls If  enabled,  the  UCM6200  allows  unauthorized  INVITE  coming  into  the PBX and the call can be made. The default setting is "No".  Warning: Please be aware of the potential security risk when enabling "Allow Guest Calls" as this will allow any user with the UCM6200 address to dial into the UCM6200. Allow Transfer If set to "No", all transfers initiated by the endpoint in the UCM6200 will be disabled (unless enabled in peers or users). The default setting is "Yes". MWI From When  sending  MWI  NOTIFY  requests,  this  value  will  be  used  in  the "From:" header as the "name" field. If no "From User" is configured, the     "user" field of the URI in the "From:" header will be filled with this value.  SIP SETTINGS/MISC Table 84: SIP Settings/Misc Outbound SIP Registrations Register Timeout Configure the register retry timeout (in seconds). The default setting is 20. Register Attempts Configure the number of registration attempts before the UCM6200 gives up. The default setting is 0, which means the UCM6200 will keep trying until the server side accepts the registration request. Video Max Bit Rate (kb/s) Configure  the  maximum  bit  rate  (in  kb/s)  for  video  calls.  The  default setting is 384.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 272 of 321    Support SIP Video Select to enable video support in SIP calls. The default setting is "Yes". Reject Non-Matching INVITE If enabled, when rejecting an incoming INVITE or REGISTER request, the UCM6200 will always reject with "401 Unauthorized" instead of notifying the requester  whether there  is a matching user  or peer  for the request. This reduces the ability of an attacker to scan for valid SIP usernames. The default setting is "No".  SIP SETTINGS/SESSION TIMER  Table 85: SIP Settings/Session Timer Session Timers Select the session timer mode. The default setting is "Accept". The options are:   Originate Always request and run session timer.   Accept Run session timer only when requested by other UA.     Refuse Do not run session timer. Session Expire Configure the maximum session refresh interval (in seconds). The default setting is 1800. Min SE Configure the minimum session refresh interval (in seconds). The default setting is 90. Session Refresher Select  the  session  refresher  to  be  UAC  or  UAS.  The  default  setting  is UAC.  SIP SETTINGS/TCP AND TLS Table 86: SIP Settings/TCP and TLS TCP Enable Configure  to  allow  incoming  TCP  connections  with  the  UCM6200.  The default setting is "No". TCP Bind Address Configure the IP address for TCP server to bind to. 0.0.0.0 means binding to all interfaces. The port number is optional. If not specified, 5060 will be used. TLS Enable Configure  to  allow  incoming  TLS  connections  with  the  UCM6200.  The default setting is "No". TLS Bind Address Configure the IP address for TLS server to bind to. 0.0.0.0 means binding to all interfaces. The port number is optional. If not specified, 5061 will be used.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 273 of 321     Note: The  IP  address  must  match  the  common  name  (hostname)  in  the certificate. Please do not bind a TLS socket to multiple IP addresses. For details  on  how  to  construct  a  certificate  for  SIP,  please  refer  to  the following document: http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-sip-domain-certs TLS Client Protocol Select  the  TLS  protocol  for  outbound  client  connections.  The  default setting is TLSv1. TLS Do Not Verify If enabled, the TLS server's certificate won't be verified when acting as a client. The default setting is "Yes". TLS Self-Signed CA This  is the  CA certificate if the  TLS  server  being  connected  to requires self-signed  certificate,  including  server's  public  key.  This  file  will  be renames as "TLS.ca" automatically.  Note: The size of the uploaded ca file must be under 2MB. TLS Cert This is the Certificate file (*.pem format only) used for TLS connections. It contains private key for client and signed certificate for the server. This file will be renamed as "TLS.pem" automatically.  Note: The size of the uploaded certificate file must be under 2MB. TLS CA Cert This file must be named with the CA subject name hash value. It contains CA's  (Certificate  Authority)  public  key,  which  is  used  to  verify  the accessed servers.  Note: The size of the uploaded CA certificate file must be under 2MB. TLS CA List Display a list of files under the CA Cert directory.  SIP SETTINGS/NAT Table 87: SIP Settings/NAT External Host Configure  a static  IP  address  and  port  (optional)  used  in  outbound  SIP messages if the UCM6200 is behind NAT. If it is a host name, it will only be looked up once.   Use IP address in SDP If enabled, the SDP connection will use the IP address resolved from the external host.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 274 of 321    External TCP Port Configure the externally mapped TCP port when the UCM6200 is behind a static NAT or PAT. External TLS Port Configures the externally mapped TLS port when UCM6200 is behind a static NAT or PAT. Local Network Address Specify a list of network addresses that are considered inside of the NAT network.  Multiple  entries  are  allowed.  If  not  configured,  the  external  IP address will not be set correctly.  A sample configuration could be as follows: 192.168.0.0/16  SIP SETTINGS/TOS Table 88: SIP Settings/ToS ToS For SIP Configure  the  Type  of  Service  for  SIP  packets.  The  default  setting  is None. ToS For RTP Audio Configure the Type of Service for RTP audio packets. The default setting is None. ToS For RTP Video Configure the Type of Service for RTP video packets. The default setting is None. Default Incoming/Outgoing Registration Time Configure  the  default  duration  (in  seconds)  of  incoming/outgoing registration. The default setting is 120. Max Registration/Subscription Time Configure  the  maximum  duration  (in  seconds)  of  incoming  registration and subscription allowed by the UCM6200. The default setting is 3600. Min Registration/Subscription Time Configure the minimum duration (in seconds) of incoming registration and subscription allowed by the UCM6200. The default setting is 60. Enable Relaxed DTMF Select to enable relaxed DTMF handling. The default setting is "No". DTMF Mode Select  DTMF  mode  to  send  DTMF.  The  default  setting  is  RFC2833.  If "Info" is selected, SIP INFO message will be used. If "Inband" is selected, 64-kbit codec PCMU and  PCMA  are required. When "Auto" is selected, "RFC2833" will be used if  offered, otherwise "Inband"  will be used. The default setting is "RFC2833". RTP Timeout During  an  active  call,  if  there  is  no  RTP  activity  within  the  timeout  (in seconds), the call will be terminated. The default setting is no timeout.    Note: This setting doesn't apply to calls on hold. RTP Hold Timeout When the call is on hold, if there is no RTP activity within the timeout (in seconds),  the  call  will  be  terminated.  This  value  of  RTP  Hold  Timeout
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 275 of 321    should be larger than RTP Timeout. The default setting is no timeout. Trust Remote Party ID Configure  whether  the  Remote-Party-ID  should  be  trusted.  The  default setting is "No". Send Remote Party ID Configure  whether  the  Remote-Party-ID  should  be  sent  or  not.  The default setting is "No". Generate In-Band Ringing Configure whether the UCM6200 should generate inband ringing or not. The default setting is "Never".   Yes: The UCM6200  will send  180 Ringing followed by 183 Session Progress and in-band audio.   No: The UCM6200 will send 180 Ringing if 183 Session Progress has not been sent yet. If audio path is established already with 183 then send in-band ringing.   Never: Whenever ringing occurs, the UCM6200 will send 180 Ringing as  long  as  200OK  has  not  been  set  yet. Inband  ringing  will  not  be generated even the end point device is not working properly. Server User Agent Configure the user agent string for the UCM6200. Send Compact SIP Headers If enabled, compact SIP headers will be sent. The default setting is "No". 100rel Configure the 100rel setting on UCM6200. The default setting is “Yes”.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 276 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 277 of 321    PORTS CONFIG The analog hardware (FXS port and FXO port) on the UCM6200 will be listed in this page. Click on    to edit signaling preference for FXS port or configure ACIM settings for FXO port.  Select "Loop Start" or "Kewl Start" for each FXS port. And then click on "Update" to save the change.   Figure 155: FXS Ports Signaling Preference  For FXO port, users could manually enter the ACIM settings by selecting the value from dropdown list for each port. Or users could click on "Detect" for the UCM6200 to automatically detect the ACIM value. The detecting value will be automatically filled into the settings.   Figure 156: FXO Ports ACIM Settings  Table 89: Internal Options/Ports Config Tone Region Select country to set the default tones for dial tone, busy tone, ring tone and etc to be sent from the FXS port. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". Advanced Settings FXO Opermode Select  country  to  set  the  On  Hook  Speed,  Ringer  Impedance,  Ringer
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 278 of 321    Threshold,  Current  Limiting,  TIP/RING  voltage  adjustment,  Minimum Operational  Loop  Current,  and  AC  Impedance  as  predefined  for  your country's analog line characteristics. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". FXS Opermode Select  country  to  set  the  On  Hook  Speed,  Ringer  Impedance,  Ringer Threshold,  Current  Limiting,  TIP/RING  voltage  adjustment,  Minimum Operational  Loop  Current,  and  AC  Impedance  as  predefined  for  your country's analog line characteristics. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". FXS TISS Override Configure to enable or  disable override Two-Wire Impedance  Synthesis (TISS). The default setting is No.  If  enabled,  users  can  select  the  impedance  value  for  Two-Wire Impedance Synthesis (TISS) override. The default setting is 600Ω. PCMA Override Select  the  codec  to  be  used  for  analog  lines.  North  American  users should choose PCMU. All other countries, unless already known, should be assumed to be PCMA. The default setting is PCMU.  Note: This option requires system reboot to take effect. Boost Ringer Configure  whether  normal  ringing  voltage  (40V)  or  maximum  ringing voltage (89V) for analog phones attached to the FXS port is required. The default setting is "Normal". Fast Ringer Configure to increase the ringing speed to 25HZ. This option can be used with "Low Power" option. The default setting is "Normal". Low Power Configure the peak voltage up to 50V during "Fast Ringer" operation. This option is used with "Fast Ringer". The default setting is "Normal". Ring Detect If set to "Full Wave", false ring detection will be prevented for lines where Caller ID is sent before the first ring and proceeded by a polarity reversal, as in UK. The default setting is "Standard". FXS MWI Mode Configure  the  type  of  Message  Waiting  Indicator  on  FXS  lines.  The default setting is "FSK".   FSK: Frequency Shift Key Indicator   NEON: Light Neon Bulb Indicator.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 279 of 321    VALUE-ADDED FEATURES FAX SENDING  The  UCM6200  supports  sending  Fax  via  web  UI  access.  This  feature  can  be  found  on  web UI->PBX->Value-added Features->Fax Sending page. In order to send fax, pre-setup for analog trunk and  outbound  route  is  required.  Please  refer  to  [ANALOG  TRUNKS],  [VOIP  TRUNKS] and  [OUTBOUND ROUTES] sections for configuring analog trunk and outbound route.  After making sure analog trunk  or VoIP Trunk is setup  properly and  UCM6200  can  reach  out  to PSTN numbers via the trunk, on Fax Sending page, enter the fax number and upload the file to be faxed. Then click on “Send” to start. The progress of sending fax will be displayed in web UI. Users can also view the sending history is in the same web page.   Figure 157: Fax Sending in Web UI   ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER  The UCM6200 supports Announcements Center feature which allows users to pre-record and store voice message into UCM6200 with a specified code. The users can also create group with specified extensions. When the code and the group number are dialed together in the combination of code + group number, the specified voice message is sent to all group members and only extensions in the group will hear the voice message.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 280 of 321     Figure 158: Announcements Center  ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER SETTINGS Table 90: Announcements Center Settings Name Configure  a  name  for  the  newly  created  Announcements  Center  to identify this announcement center. Code Enter  a code number for the custom  prompt. This code  will  be  used  in combination with the group number. For example, if the code is 55, and group number is 666. The user can dial 55666 to send prompt 55 to all members in group 666.  Note: The combination number must not conflict with any number in the system such as extension number or conference number. Custom Prompt This option is to set a custom prompt as an announcement to notify group members.  The  file  can  be  uploaded  from  page  ‘Custom  Prompt’.  Click ‘Prompt’ to add additional record. Ring Timeout Configure the ring timeout for the group members. The default value is 30 seconds.    GROUP SETTINGS Table 91: Group Settings Name Configure a name for the newly created group to identify the group.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 281 of 321    Number Configure the group number. The group number is used in combination with the code. For example, if group number is 666, and code is 55. The user can dial 55666 to send prompt 55 to all members in group 666.  Note: The combination number must not conflict with any number in the system such as extension number or conference number.  Announcements  Center  feature  can  be  found  under  web UI->PBX->Value-added  Features-> Announcements Center. The following example demonstrates the usage of this feature.  1.  Click    to create new group.   2.  Give a name to the newly created group. 3.  Create a group number which is used with code to send voice message.   4.  Select the extensions to be included in the group, who will receive the voice message.   Figure 159: Announcements Center Group Configuration  In this example, group “Test” has number 666. Extension 1000, 1001 and 1002 are in this group.    5.  Click    to create a new Announcement Center.   6.  Give a name to the newly created Announcement Center. 7.  Specify the code which will be used with group number to send the voice message to. 8.  Select the message that will be used by the code from the Custom Prompt drop down menu. To create
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 282 of 321    a new Prompt, please click “Prompt” link and follow the instructions in that page.   Figure 160: Announcements Center Code Configuration  Code and Group number are used together to direct specified message to the target group. All extensions in the group will receive the message. For example, we can send code 55 to group 666 by dialing 55666 from any extension registered to the UCM6200. All the members in group 666 which are extension 1000, 1001 and 1002 will receive this voice message after they pick up the call.   Figure 161: Announcements Center Example
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 283 of 321    STATUS AND REPORTING PBX STATUS  The UCM6200 monitors the  status for Trunks, Extensions,  Queues, Conference Rooms,  Interfaces and Parking  lot.  It  presents  administrators  the  real  time  status  in  different  sections  under  web GUI->Status->PBX Status.   Figure 162: Status->PBX Status  TRUNKS  Users could see all the configured trunk status in this section.   Figure 163: Trunk Status  Table 92: Trunk Status Status Display trunk status.   Analog trunk status: Available Busy Unavailable Unknown Error   SIP Peer trunk status: Unreachable: The hostname cannot be reached.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 284 of 321    Unmonitored: QUALIFY feature is not turned on to be monitored. Reachable: The hostname can be reached.   SIP Register trunk status: Registered Unrecognized Trunk Trunks Display trunk name Type Display trunk Type:   Analog   SIP   IAX Username Display username for this trunk. Port/Hostname/IP Display Port for analog trunk, or Hostname/IP for VoIP (SIP/IAX) trunk.   Other operations are also available in trunk status section:    Click on "Trunks", the web page will redirect to trunk configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks.   Click on    to refresh the trunk status.   Click on [ + ] to expand the status detail table.   Click on [ - ] to hide the status detail table.  EXTENSIONS  Users could see all the configured extension status in this section.   Figure 164: Extension Status
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 285 of 321    Table 93: Extension Status Status Display extension number (including feature code). The color indicator has the following definitions.     Green: Free     Blue: Ringing     Yellow: In Use     Grey: Unavailable Extension Display the extension number. Name/Label First name and last name of the extension. Message Display message status for the extension. Example: 2/4/1 Description:  There  are  2  urgent  messages,  4  messages  in  total  and  1 message that has been already read. Type Displays extension type.   SIP User   IAX User   Analog User   Ring Groups   Voicemail Groups   Other operations are also available in extension status section:    Click on "Extensions", the web page will redirect to extension configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions.   Click on    to refresh the extension status.   Click on  one of the tabs    to display the corresponding extensions accordingly.   Click on [ + ] to expand the status detail table.   Click on [ - ] to hide the status detail table.  QUEUES  Users could see all the configured call queue status  in this section. The following  figure shows the call queue 6500 being in used.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 286 of 321     Figure 165: Queue Status  The  current  call  status  (caller  ID,  duration),  agent  status,  service  level,  calls  summary (completed/abandoned) are shown for the call queue. The agent status is defined as below.  Table 94: Agent Status  The agent is available/idle.  The agent is ringing.  The agent is talking/busy.  The agent has been logged out.  On the UCM6200, Service Level is defined as the percentage of high-quality calls over all calls in the call queue, where high-quality call means calls answered within 10 seconds.  Other operations are also available in queue status section:    Click  on  "Queues",  the  web  page  will  redirect  to  call  queue  configuration  page  which  can  also  be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue.   Click on    to refresh the call queue status.   Click on [ + ] to expand the call queue detail.   Click on [ - ] to hide the call queue detail.  CONFERENCE ROOMS  Users  could  see  all  the  conference  room  status  in  this  section.  It  shows  all  the  configured  conference rooms, current users, call duration for each user and conference call.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 287 of 321     Figure 166: Conference Room Status  Other operations are also available in conference room status section:    Click on "Conference Rooms", the web page will redirect to conference room configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference.   Click on    to refresh the conference room status.   Click on [ + ] to expand the conference room details.   Click on [ - ]    to hide the conference room details.  INTERFACES STATUS  This section displays interface/port connection status on the UCM6200. The following example shows the interface status for UCM6204 with USB, WAN port, FXS1, FXS2 and FXO1 connected.  Figure 167: UCM6204 Interfaces Status  Table 95: Interface Status Indicators  USB connected.  USB disconnected.  SD Card connected.  SD Card disconnected.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 288 of 321     LAN/WAN connected.  LAN/WAN not configured.  LAN/WAN disconnected.  FXS/FXO connected.  FXS/FXO waiting.  FXS/FXO busy.  FXS/FXO not configured.  FXS/FXO disconnected.  Other operations are also available in interface status section:    Click on "Interfaces Status", the web page will redirect to ports configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Ports Config.   Click on    to refresh the interface status.   Click on [ + ] to expand the interface details.   Click on [ - ] to hide the interface details.  PARKING LOT  The  UCM6200 supports call  park using  feature  code. When there  is call  being  parked, this  section  will display the parking lot status.   Figure 168: Parking Lot Status  Table 96: Parking Lot Status Caller ID Display the caller ID who parks the call. Channel Display channel for the call park. Extension Display the parking lot number where the call is parked/retrieved. Timeout Display  timeout  (in  seconds)  for  the  parked  call.  The  status  page  will dynamically update this timer from 120 seconds (default) to 0. When the timer
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 289 of 321    reaches 0, the caller who parks the call will be called back.  Other operations are also available in parking lot status section:    Click on "Parking Lot", the web page will redirect to feature codes page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes.   Click on    to refresh the parking lot status.   Click on [ + ] to expand the parking lot details.   Click on [ - ] to hide the parking details.  SYSTEM STATUS  The UCM6200 system status can be accessed via Web GUI->Status->System Status, which displays the following system information.   General  Network  Storage Usage  Resource Usage  GENERAL  Under  Web  GUI->Status->System  Status->General,  users  could  check  the  hardware  and  software information for the UCM6200. Please see details in the following table.  Table 97: System Status->General Status ->System Status -> General Model Product model. Part Number Product part number. System Time Current system time. The current system time is also available on the upper right of each web page. Up Time System up time since the last reboot. Boot Boot version. Core Core version. Base Base version. Program Program version. This is the main software release version.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 290 of 321    Recovery Recovery version.  NETWORK  Under Web GUI->Status->System Status->Network, users could check the network information for the UCM6200. Please see details in the following table.  Table 98: System Status->Network Status -> System Status -> Network MAC Address Global unique ID of device, in HEX format. The MAC address can be found on the label coming with original box and on the label located on the bottom of the device. IP Address IP address. Gateway Default gateway address. Subnet Mask Subnet mask address. DNS Server DNS Server address.  STORAGE USAGE  Users  could  access  the  storage  usage  information  from  web  UI->Status->System  Status->Storage Usage. It shows the available and used space for the following partitions.    Configuration partition This partition contains PBX system configuration files and service configuration files.   Data partition Voicemail, recording files, IVR file, Music on Hold files and etc.   USB disk USB disk will display if connected.   SD Card SD Card will display if connected.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 291 of 321     Figure 169: System Status->Storage Usage  RESOURCE USAGE  When  configuring  and  managing  the  UCM6200,  users  could  access  resource  usage  information  to estimate  the  current  usage  and  allocate  the  resources  accordingly.  Under  web  UI->Status->System Status->Resource Usage, the current CPU usage and Memory usage are shown in the pie chart.   Figure 170: System Status->Resource Usage
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 292 of 321    SYSTEM EVENTS  The  UCM6200  can  monitor  important system  events,  log  the  alerts  and send  Email notifications  to  the system administrator.  ALERT EVENTS LIST  The system alert events list can be found under Web GUI->Status->System Events->Alert Events List. The following event are currently supported on the UCM6200 which will have alert and/or Email generated if occurred:  Disk Usage Modify Admin Password Memory Usage System Reboot System Update System Crash Register SIP Failed Register SIP Trunk Failed Restore Config User Login Success User Login Failed SIP Internal Call Failure SIP Outgoing Call through Trunk Failure Fail2ban Blocking SIP Lost Registration SIP Peer Trunk Status Click on      to configure the parameters for each event. See examples below.    1.  Disk Usage.  Figure 171: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Disk Usage
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 293 of 321     Detect Cycle: The UCM6200 will perform the internal disk usage detection based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.  Alert  Threshold:  If  the  detected  value  exceeds  the  threshold  (in  percentage),  the  UCM6200 system will send the alert.  2.  Memory Usage  Figure 172: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Memory Usage   Detect Cycle: The UCM6200 will perform the memory usage detection based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.  Alert  Threshold:  If  the  detected  value  exceeds  the  threshold  (in  percentage),  the  UCM6200 system will send the alert.  3.  System Reboot  Figure 173: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Reboot   Detect Cycle: The UCM6200 will check the system reboot based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.  4.  System Crash  Figure 174: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Crash
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 294 of 321     Detect Cycle: The UCM will detect the event at each cycle based on the specified time. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle.  Click on the switch      to turn on/off the alert and Email notification for the event. Users could also select the checkbox for each event and then click on button "Alert On", "Alert Off", "Email Notification On", "Email Notification Off" to control the alert and Email notification configuration.  ALERT LOG  Under Web GUI->Status->System Events->Alert Log, system messages from triggered system events are listed as alert logs. The following screenshot shows system crash alert logs.     Figure 175: System Events->Alert Log  User could also filter alert logs by selecting a certain event category, type of alert log, and/or specifying a certain  time  period.  The  matching  results  will  be  displayed  after  clicking  on  .  Alert  logs  are classified into two types by the system:  1. Generate  Alert:  Generated  when  alert  events  happen,  for  example,  alert  logs  for  disk  usage exceeding the alert threshold. 2. Restore  to  Normal:  Generated  when  alert  events  being  cleared,  for  example,  logs  for  disk  usage dropping back below the alert threshold.  User could filter out alert logs of “Generate Alert” or “Restore to Normal” by specifying the type according to need. The following figure shows an example of filtering out alert logs of type of “Restore to Normal”.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 295 of 321     Figure 176: Filter for Alert Log ALERT CONTACT  Users could add administrator's Email address under Web GUI->Status->System Events->Alert Contact to send the alert notification to. Up to 10 Email addresses can be added.  CDR  A  Call  Detail  Record  (CDR)  is  a  data  record  produced  by  telephone  exchange  activities  or  other telecommunications equipment documenting the details of a phone call that passed through the PBX. The CDR is composed of the following data fields on the UCM6200.   Start Time. Format: 2016-02-27 16:47:03.  Call From. Format: "John Doe"<6012>.  Call To. Format: 6005.  Answered By. Format: 6005.  Call Time. Format: 0:00:10.  Talk Time. Format: 0:00:10  Status. Format: NO ANSWER, BUSY, ANSWERED, or FAILED.  Options. Voice record playing/downloading/deleting.  Users could filter  the call report  by specifying the  date range  and criteria, depending on  how the users would like to include the logs to the report. Then click on "View Report" button to display the generated report.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 296 of 321     Figure 177: CDR Filter  Table 99: CDR Filter Criteria Inbound calls Inbound calls are calls originated from a non-internal source (like a VoIP trunk) and sent to an internal extension. Outbound calls Outbound  calls  are  calls  sent  to  a  non-internal  source  (like  a  VoIP trunk)  from  an internal extension. Internal calls Internal calls  are calls from one internal extension to another extension, which are not sent over a trunk. External calls External calls are calls sent from one trunk to another trunk, which are not sent to any internal extension. Inbound Trunks Select  certain  inbound  trunk(s)  and  the  CDR  of  calls  going  inbound  through  the trunk(s) will be filtered out. Outbound Trunks Select certain outbound trunk(s) and the  CDR of calls going outbound through the trunk(s) will be filtered out. Start Time Specify the start time to filter the CDR report. Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time. End Time Specify the end time to filter the CDR report. Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time. Caller Number Enter  the  caller  number  to  filter  the  CDR  report.  CDR  with  the  matching  caller number will be filtered out. User could specify a particular caller number or enter a pattern. ‘.’ matches zero or more  characters,  only  appears  in  the  end.  ‘X’  matches  any  digit  from  0  to  9, case-insensitive, repeatable, only appears in the end.  For example: 3XXX:  It will filter out  CDR  that having caller number  with leading  digit 3  and of  4 digits length. 3.:  It  will  filter  out  CDR  that  having  caller  number  with  leading  digit  3  and  of  any length. Caller Name Enter the caller name to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching caller name will
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 297 of 321    be filtered out. Callee Number Enter  the  callee  number  to  filter  the  CDR  report.  CDR  with  the  matching  callee number will be filtered out.  The call report will display as the following figure shows.   Figure 178: Call Report  Users could perform the following operations on the call report.   Sort Click on the header of the column to sort by this category. For example, clicking on "Start Time" will sort the report according to start time. Clicking on "Start Time" again will reverse the order.   Download Searched Results Click on “Download Search Result(s)” to export the records filtered out to a .csv file.   Download All Records Click on “Download All Records” to export all the records to a .csv file.   Delete All On the bottom of the page, click on "Delete All" button to remove all the call report information.   Play/Download/Delete Recording File (per entry) If  the  entry  has  audio  recording  file  for  the  call,  the  three  icons  on  the  most  right  column  will  be activated for users to select. In the following picture, the second entry has audio recording file for the call. Click on    to play the recording file; click on    to download the recording file in .wav format; click on    to delete the recording file (the call record entry will not be deleted).  Figure 179: Call Report Entry with Audio Recording File
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 298 of 321     Automatic Download CDR Records User could configure the UCM6200 to automatically download the CDR records and send the records to an  Email address.  Click  on “Automatic  Download  Settings”,  and configure the  parameters  in the dialog below.   Figure 180: Automatic Download Settings  To receive CDR record automatically from Email, check “Enable” and select a time period “By Day” “By Week”  or  “By  Month”  for  the  automatic  download  period.  Make  sure  you  have  entered  an  Email address to receive the CDR records.  CDR IMPROVEMENT  Starting from UCM6200 firmware 1.0.10.x, transferred call will no longer be displayed as a separate call entry in CDR. It will display within call record in the same entry. CDR new features can be found under web UI-> Status->CDR->CDR. The user can click on the option icon for a specific call log entry to view details about this entry, such as premier caller and transferred call information.   Figure 181: CDR Report
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 299 of 321     Figure 182: Detailed CDR Information  DOWNLOADED CDR FILE  The downloaded CDR (.csv file) has different format from the web UI CDR. Here are some descriptions.   Call From, Call To  "Call From": the caller ID. "Call To": the callee ID.  If "Call From" shows empty, "Call To" shows "s" (see highlight part in the picture below) and the "Source Channel" contains "DAHDI", this means the call is from FXO/PSTN line. For FXO/PSTN line, we only know there is an incoming request when there is incoming call but we don't know the number being called. So we are using "s" to match it where "s" means "start".   Figure 183: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Call To Shows "s"   Context  There are different context values that might show up in the downloaded CDR file. The actual value can vary case by case. Here are some sample values and their descriptions.  from-internal: internal extension makes outbound calls. ext-did-XXXXX: inbound calls. It starts with "ext-did", and "XXXXX" content varies case by case,  which also relate to the order when the trunk is created. ext-local: internal calls between local extensions.   Source Channel, Dest Channel  Sample 1:
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 300 of 321     Figure 184: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 1  DAHDI means it is an analog call, FXO or FXS. For UCM6202, DAHDI/(1-2) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(3-4) are FXS ports. For UCM6204, DAHDI/(1-4) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(5-6) are FXS ports. For UCM6208, DAHDI/(1-8) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(9-10) are FXS ports. Sample 2:  Figure 185: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 2  "SIP" means it's a SIP call. There are three possible format: (a) SIP/NUM-XXXXXX, where NUM is the local SIP extension number. The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored. (c)  SIP/trunk_X/NUM,  where  trunk_X  is  the  internal  trunk  name,  and  NUM  is  the  number  to  dial  out through the trunk. (c) SIP/trunk_X-XXXXXX, where trunk_X is the internal trunk name and it is an inbound call from this trunk. The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored.  Sample 3:  Figure 186: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 3  This is a very special channel name. If it shows up, most likely it means a conference call.  There are some other possible values, but these values are almost the application name which are used by the dialplan.  IAX2/NUM-XXXXXXX: it means this is an IAX call. Local/@from-internal-XXXXX: it is used internally to do some special feature procedure. We can simply ignore it. Hangup:  the  call  is  hung  up  from  the  dialplan.  This  indicates  there  are  some  errors  or  it  has  run  into abnormal cases. Playback: play some prompts to you, such as 183 response or run into an IVR. ReadExten: collect numbers from user. It may occur when you input PIN codes or run into DISA
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 301 of 321    STATISTICS  CDR Statistics is an additional feature on the UCM6200 which provides users a visual overview of the call report across the time frame. Users can filter with different criteria to generate the statistics chart.  Figure 187: CDR Statistics  Table 100: CDR Statistics Filter Criteria Trunk Type Select one of the following trunk type.   All   SIP Calls   PSTN Calls Call Type Select one or more in the following checkboxes.   Inbound calls   Outbound calls   Internal calls   External calls   All calls Time Range   By month (of the selected year).   By week (of the selected year).   By day (of the specified month for the year).   By hour (of the specified date).   By range. For example, 2016-01 To 2016-03.  RECORDING FILES  This page lists all the recording files recorded by "Auto Record" per extension/ring group/call queue/trunk, or via feature code "Audio Mix Record". If external storage device is plugged in, for example, SD card or USB drive, the  files  are stored  on the external storage.  Otherwise, internal storage  will be  used on  the UCM6200.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 302 of 321     Figure 188: CDR->Recording Files    Click on “Delete Selected Recording Files” to delete the recording files.  Click on “Delete All Recording Files” to delete all recording files.   Click on    to download the recording file in .wav format.   Click on    to delete the recording file.   To sort the recording file, click on the title "Caller", "Callee" or "Call Time" for the corresponding column. Click on the title again can switch the sorting mode between ascending order or descending order.  API CONFIGURATION  The UCM6200 supports third party billing interface API for external billing software to access CDR and call recordings on the PBX. The API uses HTTPS to request the CDR data and call recording data matching given parameters as configured on the third party application.  Before accessing the API,  the administrators  need  enable  API  and configure  the  access/authentication information on the UCM6200 first. The API configuration parameters are listed in the table below.  Table 101: API Configuration Files Enable Enable/Disable API. The default setting is disabled. TLS Bind Address Configure  the  IP address  for  TLS  server  to  bind  to.  "0.0.0.0"  means  binding  to  all interfaces. The port number is optional and the default port number is 8443. The IP address must match the common name (host name) in the certificate so that the TLS socket won't bind to multiple IP addresses. The default setting is 0.0.0.0:8443. TLS Private Key Upload TLS private key. The size of the key file must be under 2MB. This file will be renamed as 'private.pem' automatically. TLS Cert Upload TLS cert. The size of the certificate must be under 2MB. This is the certificate file  (*.pem  format  only)  for  TLS  connection.  This  file  will  be  renamed  as "certificate.pem"  automatically.  It  contains  private  key  for  the  client  and  signed certificate for the server.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 303 of 321    Username Configure the Username for API Authentication. Password Configure the Password for API Authentication. Permitted Specify a list of IP addresses permitted by API. This creates an AIP-specific access control list. Multiple entries are allowed.   For example, "192.168.40.3/255.255.255.255" denies access from all IP addresses except 192.168.40.3. The default setting is blank, meaning all IPs will be denied. Users must set permitted IP address before connecting to the API.   For more  details on CDR API (Access to Call Detail Records)  and REC API (Access  to Call Recording Files), please refer the document in the link here: http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm6200_cdr_rec_api_guide.pdf
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 304 of 321
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 305 of 321    UPGRADING AND MAINTENANCE UPGRADING  The UCM6200 can be upgraded to a new firmware version remotely or locally. This section describes how to upgrade your UCM6200 via network or local upload.  UPGRADING VIA NETWORK  The  UCM6200  can  be  upgraded  via  TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS  by  configuring  the  URL/IP  Address  for  the TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS server and selecting a download method. Configure a valid URL for TFTP, HTTP or HTTPS; the server name can be FQDN or IP address.  Examples of valid URLs: firmware.grandstream.com/BETA  The upgrading configuration can be accessed via Web GUI->Maintenance->Upgrade.   Figure 189: Network Upgrade
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 306 of 321    Table 102: Network Upgrade Configuration Upgrade Via Allow  users  to  choose  the  firmware  upgrade  method:  TFTP,  HTTP  or HTTPS. Firmware Server Path Define the server path for the firmware server. Firmware File Prefix If configured, only the firmware with the matching encrypted prefix will be downloaded and flashed into the UCM6200. Firmware File Suffix If configured, only the firmware with the matching encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the UCM6200. HTTP/HTTPS User Name The user name for the HTTP/HTTPS server. HTTP/HTTPS Password The password for the HTTP/HTTPS server.  Please follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware remotely.    Enter the firmware server path under web UI->Maintenance->Upgrade.   Click on "Save". Then reboot the device to start the upgrading process.   Please be patient during the upgrading process. Once done, a reboot message will be displayed in the LCD.   Manually reboot the UCM6200 when it's appropriate to avoid immediate service interruption. After it boots up, log in the web GUI to check the firmware version.  UPGRADING VIA LOCAL UPLOAD  If there is no HTTP/TFTP server, users could also upload the firmware to the UCM6200 directly via Web GUI. Please follow the steps below to upload firmware locally.    Download the latest UCM6200 firmware file from the following link and save it in your PC. http://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware    Log in the Web GUI as administrator in the PC.   Go  to Web  GUI->Maintenance->Upgrade,  upload the firmware file by clicking on    and select the firmware file from your PC. The default firmware file name is ucm6200fw.bin  Figure 190: Local Upgrade    Click on    to start upgrading.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 307 of 321     Figure 191: Upgrading Firmware Files    Wait until the upgrading process is successful and a window will be popped up in the Web GUI.  Figure 192: Reboot UCM6200    Click on "OK" to reboot the UCM6200 and check the firmware version after it boots up.  ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: Please do not interrupt or power cycle the UCM6200 during upgrading process. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 308 of 321    NO LOCAL FIRMWARE SERVERS  Service  providers  should  maintain  their  own  firmware  upgrade  servers.  For  users  who  do  not  have TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS server, some free windows version TFTP servers are available for download from   http://www.solarwinds.com/products/freetools/free_tftp_server.aspx http://tftpd32.jounin.net  Please check our website at http://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware for latest firmware.  Instructions for local firmware upgrade via TFTP:  1.  Unzip the firmware files and put all of them in the root directory of the TFTP server; 2.  Connect the PC running the TFTP server and the UCM6200 to the same LAN segment; 3.  Launch the TFTP server and go to the File menu->Configure->Security to change the TFTP server's default setting from "Receive Only" to "Transmit Only" for the firmware upgrade; 4.  Start the TFTP server and configure the TFTP server in the UCM6200 web configuration interface; 5.  Configure the Firmware Server Path to the IP address of the PC; 6.  Update the changes and reboot the UCM6200.  End users can also choose to download a free HTTP server from http://httpd.apache.org/ or use Microsoft IIS web server.   BACKUP  The  UCM6200  configuration  can  be  backed  up  locally  or  via  network.  The  backup  file  will  be  used  to restore the configuration on UCM6200 when necessary.  BACKUP/RESTORE  Users  could  backup  the  UCM6200  configurations  for  restore  purpose  under  Web GUI->Maintenance->Backup->Local Backup.    Click on    to create a new backup file. Then the following dialog will show.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 309 of 321     Figure 193: Create New Backup  1.  Choose the type(s) of files to be included in the backup. 2.  Choose where to store the backup file: USB Disk, SD Card or Local. 3.  Name the backup file. 4.  Click on "Backup" to start backup.    Once the backup is done, the  list of the  backups will  be displayed with date and time in the  web page. Users can download  , restore  , or delete    it from the UCM6200 internal storage or the external device.  Click  on    to  upload  backup  file  from  the  local  device  to  UCM6200.  The  uploaded backup file will also be displayed in the web page and can be used to restore the UCM6200.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 310 of 321     Figure 194: Backup / Restore    option  allows  UCM  to  perform  automatically  backup  on  the  user  specified  time.   Regular backup file can only be stored in USB / SD card / SFTP server. User is allowed to set backup time from 0-23 and how frequent the backup will be performed.    Figure 195: Local Backup
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 311 of 321    DATA SYNC  Besides  local backup, users could backup the  voice records/voice  mails/CDR/FAX in  a daily basis  to a remote server via SFTP protocol automatically under Web GUI->Maintenance->Backup->Data Sync.   Figure 196: Data Sync  Table 103: Data Sync Configuration Enable Data Sync Enable the auto data sync function. The default setting is "No". Account Enter the Account name on the SFTP backup server. Password Enter  the  Password  associate  with  the  Account  on  the  SFTP  backup server. Server Address Enter the SFTP server address. Sync Time Enter 0-23 to specify the backup hour of the day.  Before  saving  the  configuration,  users  could  click  on  "Test  Connection".  The  UCM6200  will  then  try connecting the server to make sure the server is up and accessible for the UCM6200. Save the changes and  all the  backup logs  will  be  listed on  the  web  page.  After data sync  is configured,  users  could  also
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 312 of 321    manually synchronize all data by clicking on    instead of waiting for the backup time interval to come.  RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM BACKUP FILE  To  restore  the  configuration  on  the  UCM6200  from  a  backup  file,  users  could  go  to  Web GUI->Maintenance->Backup->Local Backup.    A list of previous configuration backups is displayed on the web page. Users could click on    of the desired backup file and it will be restored to the UCM6200.   If users have other backup files on PC to restore on the UCM6200, click on "Upload Backup File" first and select it from local PC to upload on the UCM6200. Once the uploading is done, this backup file will be displayed in the list of previous configuration backups for restore purpose. Click on    to restore from the backup file.   Figure 197: Restore UCM6200 from Backup File   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note:   The uploaded backup file must be a tar file with no special characters like *,!,#,@,&,$,%,^,(,),/,\,space in the file name.   The uploaded back file size must be under 10MB. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 313 of 321    CLEANER  Users could configure to clean the Call Detail Report/Voice Records/Voice Mails/FAX automatically under Web GUI->Maintenance->Cleaner.   Figure 198: Cleaner  Table 104: Cleaner Configuration Enable CDR Cleaner Enable the CDR Cleaner function. CDR Clean Time Enter 0-23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up CDR. Clean Interval Enter 1-30 to specify the day of the month to clean up CDR. Enable VR Cleaner Enter the Voice Records Cleaner function. Choose Cleaner File Select the files for system automatic clean.   Recording Files   Conference   Queue   Voicemail   Fax   VR Clean Threshold Specify the Voice Records threshold from 0 to 99 by using local storage status in percentage.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 314 of 321    VR Clean Time Enter 0-23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up Voice Records. Clean Interval Enter 1-30 to specify the day of the month to clean up Voice Records.   All the cleaner logs will be listed on the bottom of the page.   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: Cleaner will delete data based on Recording Storage selection. If USB Disk is selected, Cleaner will only clean data in USB and local data will leave untouched. If Enable auto change is selected and USB disk is connected, Cleaner will only delete data in USB drive. Recordings Storage function can be found under web UI-> Settings-> Recordings Storage-> Recordings Storage.   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------   RESET AND REBOOT  Users could perform reset and reboot under Web GUI->Maintenance->Reset and Reboot.  To factory reset the device, select the mode type first. There are two different types for reset.   User Data: All the data including voicemail, recordings, IVR Prompt, Music on Hold, CDR and backup files will be cleared.  All: All the configurations and data will be reset to factory default.   Figure 199: Reset and Reboot
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 315 of 321    SYSLOG  On  the  UCM6200,  users  could  dump  the  syslog  information  to  a  remote  server  under  Web GUI->Maintenance->Syslog. Enter the syslog server hostname or IP address and select the module/level for the syslog information.  The  default  syslog  level  for  all  modules  is  "error",  which  is  recommended  in  your  UCM6200  settings because it can be helpful to locate the issues when errors happen.  Some  typical  modules  for  UCM6200  functions  are  as  follows  and  users  can  turn  on  "notic"  and  "verb" levels besides "error" level.  pbx: This module is related to general PBX functions. chan_sip: This module is related to SIP calls. chan_dahdi: This module is related to analog calls (FXO/FXS). app_meetme: This module is related to conference bridge.   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------  Note: Syslog is usually for debugging and troubleshooting purpose. Turning on all levels for all syslog modules is not  recommended  for  daily  usage.  Too  many  syslog  print  might  cause  traffic  and  affect  system performance. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------   TROUBLESHOOTING  On  the  UCM6200,  users  could  capture  traces,  ping  remote  host  and  traceroute  remote  host  for troubleshooting purpose under Web GUI->Maintenance->Troubleshooting.  ETHERNET CAPTURE  The captured trace can be downloaded for analysis. Also the instructions or result will be displayed in the web GUI output result.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 316 of 321     Figure 200: Ethernet Capture  The output result is in .pcap format. Therefore, users could specify the capture filter as used in general network  traffic  capture  tool  (host,  src,  dst,  net,  protocol,  port,  port  range)  before  starting  capturing  the trace.  IP PING  Enter  the  target  host  in  host  name  or  IP  address.  Then  press  "Start"  button.  The  output  result  will dynamically display in the window below.   Figure 201: PING
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 317 of 321    TRACEROUTE  Enter  the  target  host  in  host  name  or  IP  address.  Then  press  "Start"  button.  The  output  result  will dynamically display in the window below.  Figure 202: Traceroute  ANALOG RECORD TRACE  Analog record trace can be used to troubleshoot analog trunk issue, for example, the UCM6200 user has caller  ID issue  for incoming call from  Analog trunk.  Users  can  access  analog  record  trance  under  web GUI->Maintenance->Troubleshooting ->Analog Record Trace.  Here is the step to capture trace:  1.  Select FXO or FXS for "Record Ports". If the issue happens on FXO 1, select FXO port 1 to record the trace. 2.  Select "Record Direction". 3.  Select "Record File Mode" to separate the record per direction or mix. 4.  Click on "Start". 5.  Make a call via the analog port that has the issue. 6.  Once done, click on "Stop". 7.  Click on "Download" to download the analog record trace.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 318 of 321     Figure 203: Troubleshooting Analog Trunks  After capturing the trace, users can download it for basic analysis. Or you can contact Grandstream Technical support in the following link for further assistance if the issue is not resolved. http://www.grandstream.com/index.php/support   SERVICE CHECK  Enable Service Check to periodically check UCM6200. Check Cycle is configurable in seconds and the default  setting  is  60  sec.  Check  Times  is  the  maximum  number  of  failed  checks  before  restart  the UCM6200. The default setting is  3. If  there is  no response from  UCM6200 after 3  attempts (default) to check, current status will be stored and the internal service in UCM6200 will be restarted.  Figure 204: Service Check   NETWORK STATUS  In UCM6200 web UI->Maintenance->Troubleshooting->Network Status, the users can view active Internet connections. This information can be used to troubleshoot connection issue between UCM6200 and other services.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 319 of 321     Figure 205: Network Status  REMOTE ACCESS  SSH ACCESS  SSH switch now is available via web UI and LCD. User can enable or disable SSH access directly from web  UI  or  LCD  screen.  For  web  SSH  access,  please  log  in  UCM6200  web  interface  and  go  to Maintenance->Remote Access->SSH Access. By default, SSH access is disabled for security concerns. It is highly recommended to only enable SSH access for debugging purpose.
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 320 of 321     Figure 206: SSH Access
 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 321 of 321    EXPERIENCING THE UCM6200 SERIES IP PBX  Please visit our website: http://www.grandstream.com to receive the most up- to-date updates on firmware releases, additional features, FAQs, documentation and news on new products.   We encourage you to browse our product related documentation, FAQs and User and Developer Forum for  answers  to  your  general  questions.   If  you  have  purchased  our  products  through  a  Grandstream Certified Partner or Reseller, please contact them directly for immediate support.    Our technical support staff is trained and ready to answer all of your questions. Contact a technical support member or submit a trouble ticket online to receive in-depth support. Thank you again for purchasing Grandstream UCM6200 series IP PBX appliance, it will be sure to bring convenience and color to both your business and personal life.   * Asterisk is a Registered Trademark of Digium, Inc.
  FCC Caution: This  device  complies  with  part15  of  the  FCC  Rules.  Operation  is  subject  to  the  following  two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.    This  equipment has  been tested and found  to  comply with  the  limits for a Class B  digital device, pursuant to  part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  provide reasonable protection against  harmful  interference  in  a  residential installation.  This  equipment  generates,  uses  and  can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  harmful  interference  to  radio  communications.  However,  there  is  no  guarantee  that interference  will  not  occur  in  a  particular  installation.  If  this  equipment  does  cause  harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  on,  the  user  is  encouraged  to  try  to  correct  the  interference by one  or more  of  the  following measures:  —Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. —Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. —Connect  the  equipment  into  an  outlet  on  a  circuit  different  from  that  to  which  the  receiver  is connected. —Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
  Regulatory Information U.S. FCC Part 68 Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. The unit bears a label on the back which contains among other information a product identifier in the format US: GNIIS00BUCM6202. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.  This equipment uses the following standard jack types for network connection: RJ11C.  This equipment contains an FCC compliant modular jack. It is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using compatible modular plugs and cabling which comply with the requirements of FCC Part 68 rules.  The Ringer Equivalence Number, or REN, is used to determine the number of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. An excessive REN may cause the equipment to not ring in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of the RENs of all equipment on a line should not exceed five (5.0).  In the unlikely event that this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company can temporarily disconnect your service. The telephone company will try to warn you in advance of any such disconnection, but if advance notice isn't practical, it may disconnect the service first and notify you as  soon  as  possible  afterwards.  In  the  event  such  a  disconnection  is  deemed  necessary,  you  will  be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  From time to time, the telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, or operations which could affect the operation of this equipment. If this occurs, the telephone company is required to provide you with advance notice so you can make the modifications necessary to obtain uninterrupted service.  There are no user serviceable components within this equipment. See Warranty flyer for repair or warranty information.  It shall be unlawful for any person within the United States to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile unless such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or of such business, other entity, or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission  charges.  Telephone  facsimile  machines  manufactured  on  and  after  December  20,  1992, must clearly mark such identifying information on each transmitted message. Facsimile modem boards manufactured on and after December 13, 1995, must comply with the requirements of this section.  This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for more information.

Navigation menu